The Universal Shifts of Consciousness
Mind Control
You are not
Your Physical Body; You are Not the Physical Matter: You are Energy !

my picture
Picture worth
thousands words!
There
is/was a Sun Conspiracy in the Media. You can hardly find the genuine
picture of our Sun on the Internet, TV, movies/documentaries/catoons,
on video/video games, DVD's, newspapers, magazines,
books/brochures/paintings. Even, amateur's made, pictures of the Sun
don't last on Internet (like Youtube) long. The genuine pictures are
systematically being replaced with the same pictures, but not the same
Sun on them (artificially looking Sun or without the Sun). Even
Astronomy films/literature/
websites are heavily censored and don't
show the genuine pictures of our Sun and yet it is in front of our
nose! I've been researching our Sun for some time now, made hundreds of
genuine pictures of it and I've made the abovementioned conclusion,
though before I
thought that the framing was another, parallel Sun.
After more careful examination of close-up pictures, I've changed my
mind and now I am in the process of correcting my mistake in the
explanation of the pictures I posted on this website! I have about 800
pictures (but not all of them on this site yet) and some of them I have
to correct. As you can see: it is a big job and it'll take time! Bear
with me and I correct them all on all links. Thank you for your
patience!
I can also prove my findings with
pictures of Close-Ups of the artificial holographic framing consisting
of White
Rays and Pentagons of another frequency and all colours, which
(framing/pentagons) are
constantly being superimposed on our Sun and on the pink energy coming
from it. It is done deliberately, so we would not see the
right
picture of ours, of our Earth's and of our Sun's Evolution. Our Sun
is a live proof of the existence of the Creative Force, it is a piece
of it! That's how the Creative Force and our Souls look like!
This
is a Crime to cover our Sun, which is done by our governments and
those, who are behind them! Have you noticed on the pictures of the
Sun, posted on this site, that, sometimes, there are white regular
symmetrical rays coming out of it, but sometimes not?
Natural Sun
will have either no Rays at all or irregular Rays, the position of
which nobody can predict! That means that when you see our Sun or an
invisible Energy Ball of Advanced Thoughts with regular white rays (on
the picture), that is not the true picture of our Sun or of the Energy
'Ball' of
our Advanced Thoughts!
The Energy 'Ball' of the New Consciousness of
the Sun and of Advanced Human Thoughts is constantly being shielded. An
alien artificial holographic framing, consisting
of symmetrical White rays (which looks like fluorescent light tubing)
and pentagons of another, slower frequency, than this invisible New
Consciousness' Energy 'Ball' has, were there to make sure that you
would never see the
difference!
I posted a Close-Up of this structure on Home Page for
you to see what I am talking about. I am sure our
astronomers/astrophysicists noticed
this alien framing on the Sun long ago, having such powerful
telescopes. I am not an astronomer or someone of that nature, I have no
technology at my disposal, except my camera, my eyes and my brain, and
yet, I could prove it and say it, but why they never said it?!
Natural Sun would never have
symmetrical rays, like you would see on most of the official pictures.
Natural Sun's rays are unpredictable: mostly they are not visible (all
you would see is just a Huge Shiny Ball), but if the rays appear, they
can show up in any number (even just one), at any length/width and on
any side of the Sun! The rays of the natural Sun would never appear at
equal intervals and equal brightness! It's very unnatural! Have you
noticed, that the shape of the invisible Energy 'Ball' of Advanced
Thoughts (on my pictures) looks different to the shape of the natural
Sun? It doesn't really look like a Ball, it has uneven shape and that
is a very good clue!
Lydia Monroe

White Energy Beam with holographic frame of artificial white rays and
pentagons, glued to it is in my study room, 22 Feb. 2010.
Link
to Site Map listing other articles, books and useful websites:
SITE MAP

Shooting Rays above the Pacific, Elliott Heads, Australia, 3 Apr. 2010
Any
material inc. pictures can be
taken from this website without changing them!

Visible
Sun with holographic frame of artificial white rays and pentagons,
glued, picture was taken in our garden on 22 Feb. 2010.

Shooting Rays above the Pacific, Elliott Heads, Australia, 2009
My Personal
Experiences with Mind-Control
There are many old and new
movies made, which would portray the subject and the people, which I am
going to tell you about!
And
here is some interesting incident , which happened to me today (23 Jan.
2010). These things are happening to us every day in many different
ways!
I was given a present last year (January): 2 females- puppy dogs (I had
no dogs as pets in Australia before). At 10 months one of these dogs
had 4 puppies and now I have 5 dogs (one was given away as a present)!
You know who (government controllers with neg. technology or Neg. Low
Astrals), often manipulate the owners of dogs/cats and other pets
into a fighting between each other sometimes, by creating violent
behaviour in the
owners/passers by and the dogs/cats themselves. This is easily done
from the underground/aboveground stations (inc. police stations) with
the technology the Negatives have (the governments and those who are
behind them). And that creates a lot of Fear and a Separation between
people, inside people and between people and pets.
I found that those, who
doesn't like animals/birds/fish, don't like humans!
Often my dogs would
disappear for
a day to another Parallel Earth from Elliott Heads rivermouth. That
made me upset first, but now I kind of got used to it, knowing that
they will always come back to me. These, almost 4 month old puppies and
their mother are such good swimmers (like ducks) and are capable to
swim over Elliott Heads river with me!
I often try to take
my "gang of 5"
to different locations not to get bored with the same one. One of the
locations is the beautiful village next to Elliott Heads village is
Riverview (also an Anomalous place) with a nice forest along Elliott
river and 2 boatramps for people with boats (the only boatramps in
these areas). On the picture below you can see the beginning of the
Riverwalk in the forest. This beautiful place has a lot of negative
energy and you can feel it by the quantity of mosquitoes, sunflies and
midgets, esp. after the rain or fog. This is where one of the boatramps
is (to the left). Each time when I approach this place my dogs become
agitated to a different degree. Animals can sense better than humans
do. It is here where the negative energy
has been directed and not just here, but all along the picturesque
Elliott river. I had a few incidents with my dogs before. Sometimes, at
some moment they become unmanagable when you give them a bit of freedom
away from people and other dogs. But there are also days when they are
all right. This time again I decided to give them a bit of freedom
running in the forest and in the water: they are so happy when I do
it!
Right here on this spot on the picture, I was returning to my car with
my dogs, when all over sudden all 5 dogs turned into a big ball and
have been thrown to the feet of a passer by with a loud, angry barking.
I didn't put them on the leash and felt hopeless, because they were not
listening to me and continued barking and frightening the woman. When I
came up to her, she looked extremely angry and started shouting at me.
I wasn't silent too. Then I realised that the whole thing was staged by
you know who. They are good at doing nasty things to you behind your
back. I put the dogs on the leach and walked to another boat ramp of
this village. Then I noticed approaching police car and thought that
that woman called the police. That made me laugh: I doubled over almost
to the ground. That always happen when I see police tricks. It was
impossible to get to this village within 10 min., because the nearest
police station is 20 min away from that village. The police car parked
in the parking lot not too far from me. The policeman
was propably using some, hidden in the car, device on me to change my
frequency and insert me into another Parallel Earth with another
Riverview village, while watching me laughing, then left without
talking to me.
I decided to see that angry female again in 10 min. at the same place.
I found her and her
family at the other boat ramp ready to move their boat to their house
nearby. Still laughing I asked her if she called the police, she said
:"No!" In front of me there was another Alter of this woman, much more
pleasant. Then I gave her our website address and recommended her to go
on Internet and find a lot of truthfull info on it for her own benefit.
We parted as friends.
Quite often when you (mostly your soul) are moved to another Parallel
Universe/Earth, your vacant physical body is occupied either by Neg.
Low Astrals (Walk-ins) or by another scout from the group of your
Higher Self, even if it only lasts for a few minutes. You, on the other
hand, would also occupy someone's vacant body in another
Parallel
Earth, even if it only lasts for a short time. That would be enough to
mix your energy with the energies of others in another place.
And on
these pictures you
will see how Negative Low Astrals (mostly reptillians and sirians) have
been attacking me, George and our son Robert for so many years and not
just us, but the whole world. I have seen how Robert would be pushed
out of his body and this same body would be used by reptillians up to
the point that it would take a shape of a reptillian. And I heard the
reptillian speech as well.
But on the other hand, to start living fully in the non-Physical 4th
Density, we all need to get through a very negative layer/belt of
Negative Low Astrals around Earth and having experience with them here
on Earth is a good practice!
Robert Monroe portrayed these kind of Beings and this negative belt in
his books. I posted this extract, but it has been taken out from the
link by you know who. If you are interested, you will find this info in
R.Monroe's books yourself.
R.Monroe
portrayed the subject of insanity very well in his "Journeys Out-of-the-Body", p.
77- 80:
"For every known, there may
be one million unknowns, but at least here (in Locale 2, where non-physical 4th Density the starts, LM) is a starting
point.
In Locale II, reality is composed of deepest desires and most frantic
fears. Thought
is action, and no hiding layers of conditioning or inhibition shield
the inner you from others, where honesty is the best policy because
there can be nothing less.
Under the basic standards described above, existence is indeed
different. It is this difference that creates the great problems of
adjustment even when attempting to visit there while in the Second Body
(Second Body is your non-physical
body in which you travel in 4th Density. On higher Densities you
mightn't need any body, physical or non-physical, and become just a Ball of Light, LM).
The raw emotion so carefully repressed in our physical civilization is
unleashed in full force. To say that it is overwhelming at first is a
massive understatement In conscious physical life, this condition would
be considered psychotic.
My first visits to Locale II brought out all the repressed emotional
patterns I even remotely considered
I had - plus many I
didn't know existed. They so dominated my actions that I returned
completely abashed and embarrassed at their enormity and my inability
to control them. Fear was the dominant theme - fear of the unknown, of
strange beings
(non-physical), of "death," of God, of rule-breaking, of discovery, and
of pain, to name only a few. Such fears were stronger than the sexual
drive for union, which, as noted elsewhere, was in itself a tremendous
obstacle. One
by one, painfully and laboriously, the exploding
uncontrollable emotional patterns had to be harnessed. Until this was
accomplished, no
rational thought was possible. Without rigorous consistency, they begin
to return. It is much like a slow learning from unsanity to calm
objective reasoning. An infant learns to be "civilized" in
its growth
through childhood to adult status. I
suspect the same thing occurs all over again in the adaptation to
Locale II.
If it doesn't happen during physical life, it becomes the
first order of business upon death. This implies that the areas of
Locale II "nearest" the physical world
(in vibratory frequency) are peopled for the most part with insane or
near-insane, emotionally driven beings. For the most part, this seems
to be true. They include those alive but asleep or drugged and out in
their Second Bodies, and quite probably those who are "dead" but still
emotionally driven. There is evidence to support the former, and the
latter seems probable. This near area, quite understandably, is not a
pleasant place to be. It is a level or plane where you "belong" until
you learn better. I don't know what happens to those who don't learn.
Perhaps they stay there forever. The moment you disassociate from the
physical via the Second Body, you are on the fringes of this close-by
section of Locale II. It is here that one meets all sorts of disjointed
personalities and animate beings. If there is some protective mechanism
for the neophyte, it was not apparent to me. Only by cautious and
sometimes terrifying experimentation was I able to learn the art or
trick of passing through the area. I still am not precisely sure of all
items in this learning process, and so have presented only the obvious.
Whatever the process, I happily have not encountered trouble in these
passages for several
years.
Aside from the tormentors and the several outright conflicts noted in
the following reports, the principal motivation of these near
inhabitants is sexual release in all forms. If considered as the
product of recent civilizations-including those both "alive but
sleeping" and "dead". It is quite simple to understand the need for
release from repression of this basic need. The key is that
all those
in this near section attempt sexuality in terms of the physical body.
There is no recognition or knowledge of the sex drive as it is
manifested in more distant parts of Locale II. With the lingering
conditioning of our own society, it was difficult to avoid
participation at times, as response was automatic. Hopefully, one
learns to control this factor. Like attracts like...
Only when you have passed the "raw emotion" stage do you move into the
innumerable various but evidently organized activity clusters of Locale
II. It is impossible to convey to another the "reality" of this
nonphysical eternity. As stated by many in centuries past, it must be
experienced. Most importantly, in many of the places visited, the
inhabitants are "still" human. Different, in a changed environment, but
still with human (understandable) attributes."

This is how our son Robert is changing: from
normal Robert
To this kind of Robert. Negative Low
Astrals' Attack on Robert (upper picture) and on George
(lower picture) or rather their Alters in our house, 26 Jan. 2010. Most
of the time George and Robert are replaced by their souless Clones, but
the rest of the time with their Alters, so I hardly ever deal with the
genuine Robert and George and that is not easy. The constant exchange
of their Alters and Clones by you know who, would make you
confused.
In this case a very good indicator to find out who is in front of you
is to talk about subjects, which are posted on this site and if they
have no interest, then they are Clones. The same situation is happening
in many families. Pay attention on the bright Light on the ceiling: it
is not always like that, but only at the start of the opening up the
Portal in the kitchen!

Another Alter of Robert. George is at the front and Robert is at the back, below is a Close-Up of it.
3 Apr. 2010


Negative Low Astrals' attack (one of many) of us all, of our home and our Centre, apart from
numerous electronic attacks of everyone in our house for many years. As
a result our modern (20 years old), cyclone-resistant house-Centre
started showing
cracks.

The Change of Alter/Personality in Robert, 26 Jan. 2010

Robert is exposed to the Negative Low Astrals' Attack and trying to
grab my camera!

Negative Low Astrals' Attack on Robert (upper picture) and on George
(lower picture) or rather their Alters in our house, 26 Jan. 2010. On
this picture a negative Low Astral Reptilian walked into Robert's body
and creating a huge scandal, braking dishes, furnuture and attacking
George. Most
of the time George and Robert are replaced by their souless Clones (or
Low Astrals), but
the rest of the time with their Alters, so I hardly ever deal with the
genuine Robert and George and that is not easy. The constant exchange
of their Alters and Clones by you know who, would make you
confused. In
this case a very good indicator to find out who is in front of you
is to talk about subjects, which are posted on this site and if they
have no interest, then they are either Clones or their negative Alters.
The same situation is happening
in many families. Pay attention on the bright Light on the ceiling: it
is not always like that, but only at the start of the opening up the
Portal in the kitchen!

Our kitchen. This is how it usually looks like, 22 feb. 2010.

The Building up of a Portal in our kitchen. Look
at the black spot in the left upper corner, the same spot in the same
left upper corner is in the lounge room. It shows negative black Low
Astrals' presence.

George
is in our kitchen at the time of the start of opening the Portal in the
ceiling. The light on the ceiling is becoming much brighter, the
Energies are changing and Robert is disappearing! Pay attention on
black spot of negative alien energy of Low Astral Being, which covered
George!
Robert is vanishing from the kitchen. Look
at the black spot in the left upper corner, the same spot in the same
left upper corner is in the lounge room. It shows negative black Low
Astrals' presence.


The presence of Negative Low Astrals' Energy in our house
opening the Portal for Robert' and George's
parts
of the soul to move out some place else and to be replaced by some of
their other parts or to be completely replaced by someone else or by
noone for sometime! But later everything would come back to normal.

The
start of the building up of another Portal in the lounge-room, by
aggrievating Robert emotionally, so he would start attacking George or
me or both of us or our dogs! Pay attention how the energy in the room
becomes distorted, blurred, showing the movement to another dimension.
R. Monroe called it Phasing. High negative emotions seem to play a
crucial part for opening a Portal and move thousands of people to
another (higher or lower) frequency or dimension. Look at the black
spot in the left upper corner, the same spot in the same left upper
corner is in the kitchen. It shows negative black Low Astrals' presence.

The
start of the building up of another Portal in our lounge-room and
Robert is still next to George arguing with him. Pay attention on the
light on the ceiling: it is not always that bright! Normally the lamp
is dim and it shows beautifully coloured floral pattern, but now you
can't see anything.

The
start of the building up of another Portal in our lounge-room. Pay
attention on the light on the ceiling: it is not always that bright and
the brightness is growing and visibility becomes distorted!

The
start of the building up of another Portal in our lounge-room. Pay
attention on the light on the ceiling: it is not always that bright and
the brightness is growing, while the frequency/waveform of the place is
changing! Robert's part of the soul is exiting the body through the
Portal!

All
the surroundings become distorted and the brightness of the light on
the ceiling had reached the peak. The body of Robert is here, but not
the same part of his soul or even left with no soul at all (his clone).
The change of frequencies in the room at the time of opening the
Portal in our lounge-room is shown below.

Distortion
is created by Negative Low
Astrals (Inorganic) Beings when Robert is being attacked. These attacks
are also done electronically from the underground/aboveground stations
to distort your or your pet's Energy body. On some picture Robert
doesn't seem to have arms at all and his legs and arm are
distorted.
There will be plenty more
pictures of how much of negative, alien energy our house, myself and my
family and our pets are exposed to. And not just us alone, but the
Earth and the whole population on/in it. That drives many people crazy.
And in this case the best I found is either to send a firm, calm energy
to
the people/animals or take a picture of them and to show it to them
later.
When
you take a picture of a violent person or just people quarreling with
each other with a digital camera, you would see that the person's face
and
figure becomes distorted beoynd recognition, even pieces of the body
seems to tear off. That is an indication that he/she is being attacked
by
Low Astrals or by the operators from the undergroud/aboveground
stations (like police) watching everyone and doing their job, whom you
or others can't see, esp. those who quarrel. They have
the technology! The
use of picture taking can stop violent people, because Negative Low
Astrals
or police don't like to be pictured, but it can also ignite their fury.


Robert is Phasing to another dimension!

Another Alter of Robert
R.Monroe was also writing about
some of his experiences with Low Astrals and his own Phasing States in
his books.
I
portrayed a curious staged case, which just happened to me and
my dogs (but it is happening to you all the time). I
posted it on this link for everyone to read. I came to conclusion that
making us violent is also to do with us building up very strong
emotions for creating our own Portals in order to move through them to
the needed by our Higher Selves locations to do some work in the
Cosmos, like the astronauts do! I had
tried to picture Robert (my son) a few times before
(when he was violent), but each time either he would brake my
camera or
fight me or picture would later disappear. But this time it was easier
to take pictures of a violent Robert, but George (though he was tired
of
the scandals) would not cooperate.
He was against me keeping the
pictures of negative energy Beings (Low Astrals), or of violent Robert
or of negative electronic energy being sent to attack Robert and George
himself. He was also against
posting the pictures on our website for others to see, who is attacking
us
everywhere and whom we cannot see yet (but we will). George erased the
pictures and I
insisted on him restoring them. I told George that each time you start
quarreling with each other, I will be taking pictures of both of you,
for
me to analyse them later and to show them to you (he understands it
better now!)
I
wish you could see how both Robert and George became suddenly very
tired, ran away to their rooms and locked the doors! That made laugh!
And now I chase both of them with my camera with various success!
Negative Low Astrals'
attack (one of many) of us all, of our home/Centre, apart from
numerous electronic attacks of everyone in our house for many years. As
a result our modern (20 years old), cyclone-resistant house/Centre
started showing
cracks.


Astral attack on Robert, Feb.2010. Negative Low Astral walked into his
body and is trying to grab my camera! Pay attention on unnaturally long
fingers (with claws) and the hair on his left arm: Pobert's arms don't
have hair at all and Robert's head hair is curly, but on the
picture, most of his hair stand up like hedgehog's needles! Low Astrals
attack is usually lower part of the stomach, below Heart Chakra or
genitals, where the blackish spot is (normally the shirt is
much
lighter).
Some
Beings (invisible to my eyes, but not to my dogs' eyes) are in the
garden at night. Look to the left side's white column,
please.
Picture is taken by me in Feb. 2010. It is rare that I
can take a photo of it. Now 'they' started disabling
my
camera at night.

George and Robert at
the time of
the Building up of a Portal. Pay attention on the ceiling light and
interference in the distortion of visibility!
This ceiling light is
still abnormally lit up and no pattern could be seen!
Cooling off period.
Mind-Controlled George is shouting at me for taking pictures! Ceiling
lamp is still not back to normal!
This is how normally
the green lamp lit up the kitchen

Strange Phenomenon: the light from this lamp usually lit up all
kitchen, but not on this photo (for some reason), though this is how
the lamp usually looks like when it is lit up. You can see golden metal
strips separating the glass panels and the central coloful piece. But
at the time when the Portal is opened, you would not see any of that ,
but just bright light. Look at the pictures below, please!

The start of the building up a Portal in the kitchen!

And this is how the same lamp would lit up when the Portal opens;
another lamp is also abnormally bright! Pay attention at the distortion
of the vision, the distortion of the wavelength of the room and
distortion of the vibration of the people in it!

The green lamp is slowly coming back to normal, but not the other lamp
yet (above George)!

One (or both) of the lamps become abnormally bright when a Portal is
opened.

Close up of one of the lamp in the kitchen, when a Portal is opened
there.
The Portal in the
kitchen has been opened and Robert is being attacked! Both lamps on the
ceiling are abnormally bright!

The Portal has been opened in the kitchen! Robert is trying to get away
from my camera!

The Portal has been opened in the kitchen! Robert is trying to get away
from my camera!

The Portal has been opened in the kitchen! Close-Up of the lamp on the
ceiling.

The Portal has been opened in the kitchen! Portal has been opened and I
am interfering!

The Portal has been opened in the kitchen! Portal has been opened.
Robert is phasing: part of his arm is transparent!

The Portal has been opened in the kitchen! Close-Up of both lamps!

The cooling off period! Robert is hiding!

Cooling off period. The Portal is closed! Robert is still hiding!

The Portal is opened on this picture and Robert is hiding!

The slow cooling off period is on this picture and Robert is hiding!

The slow cooling off period is on this picture! Close-Up of George. The
energy of the room is still distorted.

Robert's Close-Up.
Mind-Controlled George
is in the
laundry and, attacked by Low Astrals, Robert is in the toilet behind
the yellow door. The black spot on the bag is the negative energy of
Low Astrals
(the bag in his hand is of red color, not of a black color).

Abnormally bright light in the laundry and the distortion of the
visibility are the signs that a Portal is opened up. George and Robert
are under the attack of Low Astrals!

Close-Up of abnormally bright light in the laundry and the distortion
of the visibility are the signs that a Portal is opened up. Normally
the light much dimmer.

Close-Up of George being attacked by Low Astrals. The light is so
bright but still it's very dark in the toilet with the door opened.
This is not how normally is. Black energy is on his bag! The toilet has
been used by Negative Low Astrals as a Portal for many years (to take
Robert's Soul out of his body and for themselves to walk into his
body)!

Robert is being
attacked by Low
Astrals; abnormally bright light in the laundry and the distortion of
the visibility are the signs that a Portal is opened up.
Close-Up of Robert
being attacked
by Low Astrals; abnormally bright light in the laundry and the
distortion of the visibility are the signs that a Portal is opened up.
The black spots are the negative Black energy, which the light can't
lit up.

Robert is being attacked by Low Astrals; abnormally bright light in the
laundry and the distortion of the visibility are the signs that a
Portal is opened up. Low Astral is in his body on this photo!


Close-Up of Robert being attacked by Low Astrals, who is now in
Robert's body; abnormally bright light in the laundry and the
distortion of the visibility are the signs that a Portal has opened up.

Robert is being attacked in the laundry, the Portal is opened in the
laundry and in the kitchen!

The Close-Up of abnormally bright lamp in the laundry,the Portal is
opened in the laundry!
Pay attention to distortion of the surroundings!
Below
you can see the building up of a Portal in my bedroom at night to get
me through that Portal, when I am in bed! I never remember where they
are taking me and what I am doing. I have to rely on my Higher Self:
Heshe knows better what needs to be done! Usually the only lamp on the
ceiling in my room would look dim, showing a colorful floral pattern
(see below).

That's how the lit up
lamp normally looks like in my room !

Normal looking lamp when it's switched on !

The
start of the Building up of the Portal in my Room's Ceiling at night, there was no light turned in the
room (pictured
on 26 Jan. 2010).

The Portal to other dimensions/other Parallel Universes/other Parallel
Earths is in my room and situated closer to the ceiling, around the
central Light
fitting. The shot is taken at night, 26 Jan. 2010 (there were no lights
on in
my room at that moment).

Portal to other dimensions is in my room on the ceiling, made on 26
Jan. 2010

The Portal to other dimensions is opened in my bedroom!



The Portal is opened in my bedroom


An Unknown
to me Energy
(another monitoring device?) in the form of a triangle on the ceiling
in my room at night, 26 Jan. 2010 (there were no lights in the room).
There are more pictures of different triangles in
my room, which I will post on Anomalous
Events
link later. Pay attention to the light of the lamp on the
ceiling:
this is how it usually looks like! And see how it will change when the
Portal in my room is activated: the ceiling will become extremely
bright!
Distortion
(esp. the face) is created by Negative Low
Astrals (Inorganic) Beings when Robert is being attacked. These attacks
are also done electronically from the underground/aboveground stations
to distort yours, the people's you live/work with, or your pet's Energy
bodies. On some pictures Robert doesn't seem to have arms at all, on
others his legs and arm are distorted. There will be plenty more
pictures of how much of negative, alien energy our house, myself and my
family and our pets are exposed to. And not just us alone, but the
Earth and the whole population on/in it. That drives many people crazy.
And in this case the best I found is either to send a firm, calm energy
to
the people/animals/Earth or take a picture of them and to show it to
them
later. That might have a positive effect on them.
When
you take a picture of a violent person or just people quarreling with
each other with a digital camera, you would see that the persons face
and
figure becomes distorted beoynd recognition, even pieces of the body
seems to tear off. That is an indication that he/she is being attacked
by
Low Astrals or by the operators from the undergroud/aboveground
stations (like police) watching everyone and doing their job, whom you
or others can't see, esp. those who quarrel. They have
the technology! The
use of picture taking can stop violent people, because Negative Low
Astrals
or police don't like to be pictured. I wrote about a curious staged
case, which just happened to me and
my dogs (but it is happening to you all the time) and
posted it on this link for everyone to read.
I had
tried to picture Robert (my son) a few times before
(when he was violent), but each time either he would brake my
camera or
fight me or picture would later disappear. But this time it was easier
to take pictures of a violent Robert, but George (though he was tired
of
the scandals) would not cooperate.
He was against me keeping the
pictures of negative energy Beings (Low Astrals) or negative electronic
energy being sent to attack Robert and him and
post the pictures on our website for others to see, who is attacking us
everywhere and whom we cannot see yet (but we will).
George erased the pictures and I
insisted on him restoring them. I told George that each time you start
quarreling with each other, I will be taking pictures of both of you,
for
me to analize them later and to show them to you.
I
wish you could see how both Robert and George became suddenly very
tired, ran away to their rooms and locked the doors! That made laugh!
And now I chase both of them with my camera!
If you look at the
picture below, you will see how negative Low Astrals
are manipulating the Assemblage Point of a human at the right shoulder
blade, to trigger or to make to come out the necessary (for them) Alter
(another personality) of that particular human (usually a negative one)
to do a job for them.
In old days sorcerers knew certain positions of the Assamblage Point to
manipulate them and help them and their apprentices to get to other
Universes or to some places on Earth or our Solar system. These days it
is done mainly through a sophisticated technology at a distance to
control the position of your Assemblage Point or rather Tuning Point.
This has been done to me, to George, to Robert, our son, to that angry
woman and to millions of other humans.
Reptilians (Negative Low
Astrals) portrayed in "The Biggest Secret" by David Icke

The fight between young people in one of the cities in Australia.
You can notice the involvement of Low Astrals and the change of
frequencies. Low Astrals are very active during
football/soccer/basketball and similar games, where they feast on the
energies generated by us!
********************************************
Heat Wave or
ADS?
From
reading about
microwave" Active Denial System " ( ADS) is not difficult to make a
connection to forests/city fires in modern/ancient times , all kinds of
fires at all wars and at the time of "Peace", since Atlantis . This
technology has been also used from the underground and from
planes/drones a lot. Fires are engulfing the whole world.
More
than 400 "bush" fires were reported by the weather people in
Siberia and Far East last April alone ( with + 27C), which is hard to
reach without the use of ADS in cold places in spring. Australia is
famous for " bush" fires/"heat" waves and flooding/strong winds and
that's about all natural/technology made disasters you'll find
in
Australia. Seems like a favorite destination of you know who,
especially Pine Gap. And now is the same in Florida, China, California,
Greece. Almost every "natural disaster is accompanied by "fire",
sometimes " bush" fires in the snow . Human spontaneous
combustion could happen when a person is sitting in a chair and leave
nothing else burned except the living body and it's caused by ADS. That
has been happening for thousands of years and not a secret anymore.
Microwave ovens have been used for years to cook the insides
of a
chicken faster than a conventional oven . Active Denial System
tends to be used more in summer
(no surprise ),
which is what Northern Hemishpere experience now. Maybe "Global
warming" is an excuse for ADS attacks ?
I personally found that the best way to get through
ADS
attacks ("heat wave") is to wrap a wet cotton sheet around the body
inc. head or to wear wet clothes even in bed/couch overnight
(preferably no telephone/computer/tv use at the time of the attack). I
used icy water from the fridge for the sheets/clothes and showers and
survived at +45C for a couple of weeks without airconditioner. Here are
some extracts from websites on Mind blasting Active Denial System:
".. Often " Active Denial System" used on large
masses of
people (whole cities or Targeted Persons )..driving
millions people crazy";
"the imbalance occurs,
a fundamental
change in a person's psyche, he loses self-control and becomes easily
led.. either from Earth or from a command centre lost in
space ."
What it does: " ..It produces enourmous pain
by
allegedly boiling the molecules of water in the
human
skin from sudden heating of
the skin
without damaging the skin itself ." A shortage of breath
and panic could occur !
Some info in Val's online journal http://globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&aid=5797
and http://www.trufax.org/general/psychotropic
from http://www.specialsol.com/electr5.GIF
about ADS "
..directed-energy
weapon ..directs ,or pulses ..at frequency of 95 GHz towards
all
the Graduates who are targeted persons. We all
are on the list as Alex Collier said (Alex
Collier's
information is on "Alex Collier info" link, or
see Site Map).
********************************************************
Speakers about
Mind-Control (on Youtube)
This
is some information on
youtube given by the people who went through horrific mind control
experiments (highly recommended) :
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=doh1X_gXyw0&feature=related Project
MK-ULTRA
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=F-ES8Bv0_8w&feature=related MKULTRA Victim
Testimony C:
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=suS5BitLqvU&feature=related CIA
Brainwashing Experiments - MKULTRA
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Z91bg9BghaE&feature=related CIA
Brainwashing Techniques (Cathy O'Brien)
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2eWDHDXmg7c&feature=related Torture: Training
Video for Junior CIA Trainees
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UzGPMB5AYrk&feature=related Re: MKULTRA
Victim Testimony C:
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eXDASDDrDkM&feature=related MKULTRA
Victim Testimony B:
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MSOOK3tocTk&feature=related CIA MIND
CONTROL EXPERIMENTS
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=LVGwGB0-i-o&feature=related
Welcome
to the Jungle: US Military Psychological Operations
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=itVQ7V19Wnw&feature=related
Cathy
O'Brien - Day In The Life (GNN) http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9FDK_453rjw&feature=related
Mark Phillips on Mind Control
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vgocXQJaqSk&feature=related
Preview of Interview with Mark Phillips
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1x6CWs4mJ2s&feature=related
Preview of Interview with Cathy O'Brien
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tuuYJIcQ2uY&feature=related
TRANCE Form America - 1of7
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Vrl5Ti35Clk&feature=related Child Prostitution, Satanism,
& The CIA - 1of7
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=aptkO-OySPc&feature=related
Arizona Wilder on Government Mind Controlled Slaves, pt1 http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=C03VcqFHBAE&feature=related
Who is telling the truth? http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uv9GXOilbAw&feature=related
Confessions of a mother goddess, David Icke. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uAGTJErVNBU&feature=related
David Icke- Humans transform to Reptiles
********************************************
Non-Physical
Mind-Controlling Devices for Crown Chakras
(England)

They are
invisible
to the eye and
this is what I often feel is above my head to block the Universal
information coming to me through the Crown Chakra. This phony
holographic device looks like crown giving the name of the head chakra
as "Crown Chakra" . As you can see they didn't just framed our Sun up ,
but they also framed our Chakras up!
More info on:
****************************
Drones

The 1st plane - drone pictured by me, usually
all my attempts fail.
Interesting
information about inmanned flying cameras
of all
shapes and sizes called Drones you can find on this website :
http://www.earthfiles.com/news.php?ID=1402&category=Environment
"New
Instruments of Surveillance and Social Control: Wireless Technologies
which Target the Neuronal Functioning of the Brain"
FROM:
www.globalresearch.ca/index.php&context=va&aid=8263
*********************************************
Remote
Viewers on Youtube (a part of Mind-Control)
Ed Dames EXCLUSIVE Interview - Part 1: Remote Viewing
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=v2GAYwvDSFg&feature=related
Ed Dames EXCLUSIVE Interview - Part 2: Psychic Invasion
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=C4dW2cWbtgE&feature=related
Ed Dames EXCLUSIVE Interview - Part 3: Consciousness
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=CVvsLC94v-0&feature=related
Ed Dames EXCLUSIVE Interview - Part 4: Movie Plot Points (Bob Monroe is
mentioned)
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7WKNp-WY_-w&feature=related
Remote
Viewing Terrorist Attacks (Ed Dames)
Ingo
Swann is consided one of the most gifted remote viewers and intelligent
man, the author of a few books, one of them is "Penetration", which is
worth reading and here are some interviews done by Art Bell with Ingo
Swann:
Ingo Swann http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_vu6ehLgf0A&feature=related
Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 1
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JSsVT8LO1v0&feature=related
Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 2 http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UKD1AYCPo4Y&feature=related
Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 3 http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zNkLoYaRGds&feature=related
Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part
4 http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9ggY6h8qHiI&feature=related
Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 5 http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8SgEKLiwOKk&feature=related
Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 6 http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Aj-mbcST85E&feature=related
Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 7 http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iwcjcs4Eiac&feature=related
Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 8
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XZKuFmlIqtE&feature=related
Remote
Viewing Program
- Ingo Swann Part 9 http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=d23iGh-Atw8&feature=related
Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 10 http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kC-MNUtxSAM&feature=related
Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 11 http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zFE0IKCTu9Y&feature=related
Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 12 (last part) http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ER37lDs-OMw&feature=related
****************************************
Hemi-Sync and Remote
Viewing #1
Hemi-Sync and Remote Viewing #2
Hemi-Sync and Remote Viewing #3
Hemi-Sync and Remote Viewing #4
CIA Uses Psychics To Surveil and Control Americans
Using Psychic Abilities Wisely & Well 1/3
CIA Remote Viewing Program, Mind control, precognition
REMOTE VIEWING HOW TO ASSOCIATIVE ASTRAL PROJECTION MIND CONTROL
How Remote Viewing Works: Dr. Simeon Hein Pt. 1
An OBE or Out-of-Body Experiment with a PSI Component
Hal Puthoff pt.5 of 5- Remote Viewing and Consciousness
An OBE or Out-of-Body Experiment with a PSI Component
What Remote Viewing Tells Us About UFOs and ETs (Part I)
Remote Viewing (1)
Remote Viewing: What is remote viewing?
What Remote Viewing Tells Us About UFOs and ETs (Part II)
Predicting headlines using Remote Viewing
Remote Viewing - Joe McMoneagle interview
Joe McMoneagle, Remote Viewing Workshop
Michael Shermer Remote Viewing Experiment Part 1
How Remote Viewing Works: Dr. Simeon Hein Pt. 1
Hal Puthoff pt.5 of 5- Remote Viewing and Consciousness
What is Remote Viewing?
CIA Remote Viewing Program, Mind control, precognition
The Remote Viewers -part one
Remote Viewing Pt.1
Remote Viewing Pt.2
Remote Viewing Pt.3
Remote Viewing Pt.4
Remote Viewing Pt.5
Remote Viewing Pt.6
Remote Viewing Pt.7
Remote Viewing Pt.8
Remote Viewing Pt.9
Remote Viewing with Russell Targ and Alan Steinfeld
Remote Viewing 1 of 2
Joe McMoneagle, Remote Viewing Workshop
Michael Shermer Remote Viewing Experiment Part 1
Art Bell - Ed Dames was RIGHT! (The Killshot)
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2kPs3aDR2z8&feature=related
Remote Viewing the Future: GRIM PREDICTIONS
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JxlyYDYOoG4&feature=related
Australian Psychic Of The Year 2008 - Jason Betts
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3gRQBKFw4L8&feature=related
Vibration creates matter
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2DGPV7SB88c&feature=related
FALSE MIRACLES SIGNS AND
WONDERS IN RUSSIA !! BLUEBEAM HAARP IN RUSSIA !!!
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=G9idAkMEFaE
*********************************
Appropriate
articles from Internet
'World's greatest illusion'
http://bigpondnews.com/articles/OddSpot/2009/12/20/Worlds_greatest_illusion_408516.html
The Indian rope trick
is often
described as the 'world's greatest illusion' - yet a man in the slums
of Delhi claims he can do it.
In fact, not just one
man but two.
First, the trick: it
involves a rope
being made to rise upwards and then once rigid, a young boy is
encouraged to climb to the top.
In Indian folklore he
disappeared at the top only to reappear after being called by the
magician.
In the more elaborate
versions, the magician himself climbs the rope after the boy and also
disappears.
An array of severed
limbs are then
thrown down, the magician returns to earth, collects the limbs in a
covered basket and the boy magically reappears unharmed.
Most magicians believe
the trick to
be impossible and back in 1934, the Magic Circle offered several
hundred guineas to anyone who could do it.
Now, in a deprived area
of the Indian capital, at least two men claim they can do the infamous
trick.
The first and possibly
the most well known is a man called Ishamuddin Khan.
There are pictures of
him performing the trick on the internet and he first got noticed when
he baffled an audience in 1995.
When we met him in
Katputli, the
puppeteers' colony in Delhi, he demanded some ninety thousand rupees
(about 1,200) to replicate it for us a figure which was out of our
budget.
Instead we found Hasan
Khan apparently no relation who offered to do the trick for the much
more modest fee of 460.
We turned up at the
scrubland near his one-roomed home to find a crowd had already gathered.
A table was set out and
he warmed up his audience by making eggs disappear, as well as
producing water from apparently nowhere.
A bamboo frame was then
produced and Hasan announced he was going to make himself disappear
inside it.
It was placed on the
ground, Hasan
climbed in, his head was covered and his father Anardin shook a
traditional Indian musical instrument called the dumru and played the
flute.
Minutes later he
dropped the cloth and plunged his hands into the apparently empty
bamboo frame. It would appear, no Hasan.
But this was a show
like no other my colleagues or I had ever seen.
It seemed to teeter on
the brink of
chaos all the way through with various male assistants having to
continually beat back the youthful onlookers with bamboo sticks.
Not usually a tactic
known for enticing your audience to return.
Next Hasan's father
produced a bunch
of fruit from a basket only to trigger an almighty scrum as the
watching children dived for the pickings.
Hasan's father thwacked
and hit them repeatedly. Obviously, this was one tough audience.
Finally, the Indian
rope trick. From out of a wicker basket Hasan appeared to coax the rope
while playing his flute.
It looked rigid enough
and rose about 10ft to 12ft in the air.
Hasan and his
assistants had to hold
it steady as a small boy climbed his way to the summit and saluted
rather proudly once there.
He did not disappear,
but as soon as he was back on terra firma, the rope collapsed.
It was all rather
impressive to our
untrained eyes. Hasan told us: 'This trick has been passed down through
generations of my family.
'My grandfather learned
it from his grandfather, who learned it from his grandfather.'
Indeed he went even
further and
claimed it was his family who had created and invented the trick, which
is mentioned as far back as the 17th century by the Indian emperor
Jahangir.
He has a certificate
from the Guinness World Records for magic and it takes pride of place
in his one-roomed home.
'I can't tell you how
it's done,' he said.
'This is a family
secret and my skill but it's magic and some hypnotism.
'I hypnotise the crowd
but I am not going to tell you how I do it.'
Sunday, December 20,
2009 » 10:51am
'Werewolf' patients follow
the moon
The
main place from where the Mindcontrol of the population on Earth is
done is the Moon. And when the Moon is facing us fully (full Moon) the
exposure to negative mind control is 100%. Men are more vulnerable to
it than women, LM.
http://bigpondnews.com/articles/Health/2009/12/13/Full_moon_brings_out_patients_405547.html
A study in an
Australian hospital has identified a spike in out-of-control 'werewolf'
patients when a full moon is out.
There were 91 emergency
patients
rated as having violent and acute behavioural disturbance at the
Calvary Mater Newcastle hospital from August 2008 to July 2009.
Leonie Calver, a
clinical research
nurse in toxicology, said almost a quarter of the cases (23 per cent)
occurred on a night of full moon and this was double the number for
other lunar phases.
The patients all had to
be sedated and physically restrained to protect themselves and others.
'Some of these patients
attacked the staff like animals biting, spitting and scratching,' Ms
Calver said.
'One might compare them
with the werewolves of the past, who are said to have also appeared
during the full moon.'
Ms Calver said werewolf
mythology
included reports of people rubbing 'magic ointment' onto their skin or
inhaling vapours to induce the shirt-rending transformation from man to
beast.
The main ingredients
were belladonna
and nightshade, she said, both substances that could produce delirium,
hallucinations and delusion of bodily metamorphosis.
Ms Calver said it
appeared the
'modern-day werewolf' preferred alcohol or illicit drugs, as more than
60 per cent of the patients reviewed in the study were under the
influence.
'We don't know if its
more fun to
use drugs and alcohol under a full moon or if their behavioural
disturbance is directly influenced by the moon,' she said.
'Our findings support
the premise
that individuals with violent and acute behavioural disturbance are
more likely to present to the emergency department during ... full
moon.'
The research is
published in the pre-Christmas edition of the Medical Journal of
Australia.
Sunday, December 13,
2009 » 09:47am
******************************
Fritz
Springmeier
and Cisco Wheeler on Mind
Control
Deeper Insights into the Illuminati Formula
I
don't have all of this book by Fritz Springmeier
and Cisco Wheeler on pdf, but only part of it:
PART 2. HOW HELP COMES ABOUT FOR MINDCONTROL VICTIMS
Page 314
When our system first began doing collages as therapy, the third
collage we did of our system was this one of the Gems, the Grand Druid
Council hierarchy, the daisy chains and the fairy, and yet it was one
of the last to be understood. When our deeper alters got done with the
collage, our front alters didn’t understand what they had
done.
It took several years to learn what all the pieces in the collage
meant. What the picture shows are the deeper workings of the system,
which are run by early splits. In the background is a veil. In front of
it are gems, and diamonds. There are two kinds of gems. One are the
gems which link to the computers, and the other are the diamonds in the
rough, the clean slate alters which have yet to be programmed. A
diamond in the system (pyramid) acts as a radio crystal to receive
direction and energy from Satan. The energy is then distributed via the
crystal and the gems to the system. This diamond is encapsulated within
a gold womb-shaped crystal.
The gems in the system (ruby, diamond, topaz, onyx, emerald, sapphire,
opal, amethyst, obsidian, turquoise, etc.) are linked to the book of
Revelation’s Heavenly City. The 12 gems send out signals
according to their color coding, which are then transmitted by the
correct color of ribbon to the correct colored coded alters. Their
messages, the scripts, are acted out on the stage of life, which is
portrayed behind the erect gold or platinum statue (AntiChrist figure).
Gold represents divinity in the Illuminati. In front of that is the
clock with the hierarchy. The clock is a crystal pyramid representing
the pyramid in the middle of the Grand Druid Council (aka Executive
Control Board). It’s 12 hours are the 12 positions of the
Grand
Druid Council which link to their 12 job responsibilities or
characteristics and the 12 colors. The 13th number is
Satan’s,
and it is color coded platinum. The Grand Druid Council like the
Knights of the Round Table sit around a circular table. The pyramid is
meant to have 13 stairs to it. The daisy chains were used to link our
early parts to their master. Our Daddy would make daisy chains for us.
Most people would never suspect something like this being mind-control
reinforcement. These daisy chains were delicate and very sensitive to
touch. We were not to break or touch the daisy chains. Our internal
daisy chains link to small 3 year old child alters. The daisy chains
represent soul ties and the artificial programmed love they wanted us
to have toward our master. A severe pain in our head, like a hole being
drilled into our head, was refrained by the programmers as being a hole
for the sun to shine through to raise daisy flowers for Daddy. Flowers
are important family links in the programming.. The bud protects a
daughter. The root and stem the mother figure. The soil ceremony
protects the grandparents, and is grounded in the earth. The Fairy
alters are involved in the hour glass and are the creative force within
the system. Here Whisper (Tinkerbell figure) sprinkles Star dust on the
light side. The yellow brick road, like a whirlwind that pulls the
vehicle, leads to divinity, a mother goddess figure. A gold crown rests
upon this stone statue. A tree runs through the entire situation. Those
who are familiar with the trees in the system, realize that they are
used to hang all the programming. The willow and oak roots run through
the collage. Although it is somewhat difficult to notice, off to the
right side of Satan are 9 chambers, which represent the various
chambers on the Cabalistic tree of life. Interconnected bubbles are
interconnected worlds and galaxies in the system. The numerous
butterflies are a ring of light that lay at the base of the neck.
Page 315
p_cisco.jpg
Page 316
p_daisy.jpg
Page 317 ...
The Daisy World (previous page)
We have a special world of devotion to our master called the daisy
world. An entire world of alters who love him make up this world. The
picture looks some what reminiscent of some of the Fantasia scenes. The
unicorn takes us into this magic world. The waterfall cleans our minds
of the trauma memories.
A BOXED, SINKING DISCOURAGED SENSE ABOUT LIFE. p_box.jpg (next page 318)
One of the traumas is to take a child, put him in a trunk and dump him
into water. The trunk fills up and the child passes out, and then is
rescued in the nick of time before it dies. This is a common
programming trauma. It is this type of trauma that is attached to
programming. Feelings come in all shapes and sizes, and it is O.K. to
have feelings. When the system did this an alter wrote, "The way I
feel, locked and sinking, red sails in the moonlight."
The ROLE of a BETA-DELTA TEAM OF ALTERS. p_beta-delta.jpg
(overleaf after next page 319)
The hour glass controls the system. It’s balance in relation
to
the clock and compass is crucial. The robots stand in military ranks
ready to serve their national leaders. The piano cords at the left are
codes for some alters. Maybe the reader will be able to figure out what
some of the images mean on their own.
Insert Table of Contents ....................... 320
Page 321
p_warning.jpg
Page 322 ...
INTRODUCTION
WHY should we bother struggling to save victims of mind-control?
Why should we bother with working with victims of mind-control? We can
think of a number of excellent reasons. First, if we as a people do not
stand up to the World Order’s mind-control, then we are
giving
them a green light, a free ticket to keep on doing it. And if victims
of mind-control do not see people wanting to rescue them, then they
will not fight the mind-control, and if they do not fig/it they will
not get free. It’s that simple. Each of us by only trying to
rescue one or two persons is opening the door to freedom for all
victims of mind-control. Do we want the door left open, or the door to
freedom shut? It is our choice. Second, the person you save from
mind-control may have been someone who would have been used in some
secret operation to seriously hurt someone else or to seriously damage
the fabric of a free society by smuggling guns, or dope or laundering
money. By helping victims of mind-control you are making life a better
place. Third, by helping a mind-control victim you will learn who you
are, what gifts God has placed within you, how the human mind
functions, as well as having your own weaknesses exposed so that they
can be worked on. There is nothing more powerful than watching God
Almighty answer prayers of desperation with miracles. Bottom line, you
will be a better person for helping those who are in such desperate
need. Fourth, by learning how the mind-control operates and exhibits
itself you will be able to prevent others from infiltration by damage
agents, and to prevent parents from unwittingly allowing a day-care
center or other institution to program their children. In other words,
we will be in a better position to prevent the myriads of harm that
come from the wide-spread customs of mind-control. Intellectual
awareness of how the mind-control is done is not the total solution,
but it does act as a buffer to help us fight this mind-control madness.
We still have much to learn, but we hope to pass on what we have
learned to others that we might all make the soonest use of the best
help available for mind-control victims. If you know Almighty God, then
you know that His strength is perfected in our weakness. He will take
our few loaves of understanding, and multiply it.
THE HARVEST OF WEEPING
‘Be not deceived: God is not mocked: for whatsoever a man
soweth,
that shall lie also reap. For he that soweth to his flesh shall of the
flesh reap corruption; but he that soweth to the Spirit shall of the
Spirit reap life everlasting." Galatians 6:7-8
The mind-control that has been carried out secretly in this 20th
century on such a vast scale has left us with a harvest of weeping. The
children of this dispensation cry after the virtues and the oneness
within the family unit. Their hearts have become broken through the
lack of knowledge, and instability of not knowing the security of a
father’s love. Within this rising generation, many c/iildren
walk
in a famished land where there is no real love. They receive only the
remnant of broken homes and relationships, and overworked parents.
Page 323 ...
When the heart has gone out of the family, broken lives become as
fragments of broken glass. For many children feel as though their
hearts have been washed away in the silent tears of their
incompleteness. Having no voice within the kingdom to say "peace be
still,, they suffer from the scars of emotional abandonment. In bondage
they are unable to see their way through the journey of life. Where do
they go when they feel there’s no place to turn? Who do they
talk
to, when there’s nobody who wants to listen? Who do they lean
on
when there’s no stable foundation? The Spirit of Darkness
soon
covers this generation with shattered dreams. In this pool of
contamination, parents rise against parents. Brothers and sister become
pulled between their loyalties within the family, causing a severing
within thie heart of the family unit. In the turmoil of confusion and
uncertainty comes a brokenness wit hun the hearts of the offspring,
which causes the soul to bleed with the emotion of inner loneliness.
Through a grieving process, the scars of neglect turn in rebellion,
screaming with a voice of ‘PLEASE SOMEBODY LOVE ME." In
planting
of a bad harvest, come the reward of "I looked that I should bring
forth grapes, but I broughut it forth with wild grapes." For when the
kingdom has fallen and the hedge is gone, the harvest will be overtaken
and trodden down. The landscaping and cultivation will be a thing of
the past. There will be briers and thorns in the vineyard and the
harvest will cease to produce fruit of quality. Woe unto the man thiat
has rewarded evil unto his children. As the extortioner is in the land,
so the young will turn in sorrow and in anger and know him not. He made
me not, he had no understanding, I do not love him. As the children of
yesterday and today were overthrown in the wilderness, so will come the
weeping for the fathers, for man’s glory becomes his shame.
Our
leaders have planted pain and sorrow, and now we have a harvest of
weeping. We think of the countless child victims who waited for the
parents to come, who waited for love and acceptance, but were never
good enough for the programmers. I want to weep for the humaness that
hias been stolen from so many child victims of mind control. I weep for
every scream that was never allowed, and for each child that could no
longer fight for themself or their own mind. I weep for the silent
tears that were not allowed. And I grieve when I think of how grieved
Almighity God must be. I grieve that the cycle continues, and that
there is no voice for the new cycle of victims, the new generation of
victims who are receiving sophisticated high-tech mind-control that has
been perfected over centuries and in the Nazi concentration camps,
universities, hospitals, labs, and secret underground facilities. This
book is meant to be a voice for those victims who have no voice.
But this book is not only concerned about what has been stolen from the
victims of mind-control, but also about the sacrifices that sincere
therapists and support persons have endured. This next section is
written in hopes that it will help therapists in their struggles. We
make no claims that this information will work for therapists, we are
merely passing on what we have learned from one friend to another
friend. Best wishes, and may God bless your work
Page 324
An overview of what the support team faces
When the victim first comes into therapy it will typically be for some
other problem, such as an eating disorder. An astute therapist will
notice the clues which signal that mind-control is very probable,
&
then will follow up. There are four areas of therapy that should not be
neglected:
a. safety issues
b. helping the victim get to know themselves,
c. building positives such as love, care, the Word of God into the
recovering victim’s life.
d. dismantling the PDE (the primal dissociative experience), along with
the programming foundations.
As a little method to remember these things, we came up with the word
S-I-N-C-E-R-E, which stands for Safety, Information, and, Creating
positives, Ejecting, erasing, expelling, the PDE & internal
computers, R realizing, Emancipation. Each of these areas are essential
for success. What do we mean Realizing Emancipation? When we are
talking about mind-control, freedom is a state of mind. The victim must
free their mind from the control of the world and realize who they are
as God intended and planned. It is not enough to erase the bad, one
must realize one’s identity and birthright in God that was
stolen. In fact, as our book points out, a mind-control victim will not
let loose of their mind-control unless something better is adopted. We
sincerely pray that those victims who want out will find Jesus Christ,
and realize the emancipation that is found in Christ Jesus. Let us
recap the four essential areas of work. If the victim is not totally
SAFE, then very little work of substance will take place, even though
the client might display a great healing (which is a cover program.) If
the victim, does not get to know who they are, what has happened to
them, and what mind-control is all about, they will likely go into
denial and leave therapy.
If the programming is not worked on, and dismantled, it will torment
the person until they are too beat down and too tormented &
intimidated to continue. If the victim is not given positives and
positive reasons to live, if they do not experience love, they will not
value themselves, and will not be motivated to work through the
horrendous work that must be done. They need to have positive
worthwhile goals to work toward. This book is not the final word on
this subject. This book will give the reader the most indepth look into
the therapy of trauma-based mind-control to date. There are only a few
therapists who have worked with PDEs. These are dangerous, & it
is
hard to present the successful techniques on how to break the deeper
programming without giving the other side the knowledge on how to
prevent such therapeutic work. May God grant the strength &
courage
you need.
Page 325 ...
ACCESSING
Before the support team and the victim can work on accessing issues,
they need to understand HOW a mind-control slave can be accessed. Allow
us to give a summary of some of the more usual methods of accessing,
that is making contact with a mind-control slave. (In fact almost all
of these were standard methods used on the author.):
MEDIA: access codes/colors/story schemes/pictures in the newspapers,
television, Christian television, ads, radio, and news events that are
broadcast in all fashions.
PERSON TO PERSON: Eye winks, eye blinks, hand signals, body gestures,
clothing, colors, words, karaoke song selections sung, other victims of
mind control, taps such as 3 taps, and the arrival of particular
persons, one’s children, one’s boss,
one’s relatives.
TECHNOLOGICAL: Sounds in morse code, break lights done in code, head
light flashes, gunshots in area such as 3 gunshots, blank telephone
calls, recorded messages left on answering machine, telephone tones,
late calls from master, airplanes flying certain patterns in area,
helicopters flying certain patterns, and lights on helicopters.
ITEMS: Keys, business cards, certain tokens or certain bills, letters
such as chain letters, colors on cars, statues at sites, signs, houses,
and colors on houses, buttons.
SPIRITUAL: Astral projection, telepathy.
(Students can refer to our other books for more information on
accessing methods and codes.)
As the casual reader of the above will realize, it is almost impossible
for a victim of mind-control to be isolated from being accessed. This
is why it is essential to remove the victim from their ordinary
environment and get them to a safe place where they are secure and can
be worked with, without interference. Up to now, only a handful of
victims in history have ever received this, and then only temporarily.
Because it is so difficult to isolate the victim from everything that
might be a code, a few knowledgeable sincere therapists have resorted
to desensitizing the codes, and putting safety mechanisms that cause
the victim to get angry if someone tries to access them, and allows
them to block out the codes. However, this is only part of the answer,
because if they physically get a hold of an ex-victim, they can
traumatize that part of the mind that is resisting the codes and
destroy it so that they break the safety mechanisms. The first step in
desensitizing the codes is to look at them with the alters, to go over
it consciously and know that it is a trigger. Once the conscious mind
knows something is a trigger, it is harder for it to work. Most of the
triggers, codes and cues work at the subconscious (or unconscious
mind). I write unconscious--because they hit the mind at a very deep
level. These codes are not something sitting close to the front of the
mind. A skilled victim that is undergoing therapy, may want to play
along with the abusers so that the Illuminati do not have a clear idea
of where the system is rather than bucking the system cold turkey.
Again each situation for each victim is unique & calls for some
clever responses. Running from the abusers rather than confronting them
when they publicly try to secretly access the victim may send the wrong
signal that the victim fears the abusers. The abusers love to see fear;
fear only encourages them. Hopefully, the support team can develop
their own strategies, without us having to spell it all out, &
then
having someone mechanically "do it by the book." As a final note, we
encourage readers who want to understand the subject of accessing
better to review various related parts in our books. For instance,
there is also some information in our twinning article that might be
helpful.
Page 326 ...
BOUNDARIES & ROLES
Because the therapists speak a special language, and are recognized as
experts, they have exercised a monopoly on providing information on
mind-control. People want to believe that the experts have answers, and
therapists have played the part. The public may have underestimated how
much they have wanted their image of their therapists to be true, and
how reluctant they are to admit the shortcomings of their experts. We
are calling for a re-evaluation of the treatment of programmed
multiples, and suggesting the formation of support teams to assist
programmed multiples in gaining their freedom from mind-control. Dr.
Frank Putnam, one of the most famous psychiatrists who is recognized as
an expert by the psychiatric community and who worked as part of the
DSM-IV Work Group on Dissociative Disorders, wrote in his book
Diagnosis & Treatment of Multiple Personality Disorder, (1989,
pp.
133-134) "Very few of us have had any formal training in the diagnosis
and treatment of MPD. Although some therapists become
‘instant
experts’ upon seeing their first case, most feel that they do
not
have the skills necessary to treat these patients." While having
self-doubts about their abilities, the professional therapists have
been very resistent to admitting to nonprofessionals their
shortcomings. For instance, in 1995, one of the leading professionals
told our co-author, who wanted to share the material of our Vol. 2 and
this book with the therapeutic community that "you have absolutely
nothing to teach us." Maybe a good place for all of us to start is with
humility and a spirit of teachableness. It is probably safe to assume
that if you are reading this book, you already have the desire to
learn. We believe that the climate for learning has changed, and that
the initial frosty reception that our material received many years ago
will not be repeated by those who are sincerely interested in helping
victims. This section contains some valuable suggestions on how to
begin working with a programmed multiple. Some therapists/ministers are
under the misconception that they do not have to work with "alter
personalities" to help these victims of mind-control. What they do not
comprehend is that the person they know and see (who is the host alter)
IS also only an alter. They generally work under the misperception that
the host personality IS the person, and that other alters are "the
alters" (which these misguided therapists/ministers perceive as "the
problem"). So rather than work with any alters, they work with the host
alter. Their misperception, which leads to such unwitting contradictory
behavior on the therapists’ part, would be hilariously funny,
if
it were not for the gravity of the situation. Host alters can be
extremely resistent in admitting that they are multiples. In fact,
rather than argue and debate the issue with host alters, skilled
therapists come in the back door, by simply relating matter of fact,
what all the other alters have been doing during therapy. The
accumulation of evidence over a long period of time will eventually
convince the host alter through the back door that they are part of a
multiple system. On the flip side, many less visible alters may carry
anger toward the host for the host alter’s denial of their
existence. Do not expect straightforward
evidence of a transcript of a session where several alters of a
multiple appear, or a camcorder tape of a session showing different
alters to automatically convince a host alter that he/or she is a
multiple. Host alters will often study the available literature about
DID (MPD), and will often challenge the therapist to debates to prove
to the therapist that they are not a multiple. Even though the
Page 327 ...
therapist has witnessed the multiplicity, it will be hard to "prove"
anything to the doubting host alter. Remember the doubting philosopher
who after long thought finally realized "I think, therefore I am"--if a
person is emotionally invested in doubting something, the mind has an
amazing ability to think up reasons to doubt obvious facts. The support
team for a multiple will need to be skilled in getting the multiple to
see things via "back door" techniques rather than head-on debates. It
is a traditional therapeutic practice to establish contracts with
Multiple Systems. Generally, therapists attempt to establish a contract
with as many alters as possible. They will endeavor to explain in the
language that the child alters understand what is being agreed upon
when a contract is negotiated between the child alter and the therapist.
The primary area that the therapist is concerned with is "hurt" by the
Multiple to anyone else or the Multiple System’s own body.
The
American Psychiatric Association’s contract reads at one
point,
"I will not hurt or kill myself or hurt or kill anyone else, internal
or external, on purpose or accidently, now or in the future." The other
major area of concern is setting limits regarding the treatment.
Traditionally, the therapists have limited the client’s time
to
their help, the number of phone calls they are allowed to make, etc.
This works fine for the therapists. However, the therapeutic community
is in denial or under its own delusions that it is making significant
progress with the programmed multiples that are coming in for therapy.
By and large, the therapists are simply working with the front worlds
of very deep and complex systems of alters. The cults are continuing
their use of essentially all slaves that are undergoing therapy today.
The time has come to turn that situation around and get genuine help
for these suffering slaves. The therapist will become the parent image
for a mind-control victim’s alters. Is this good or bad?
Should
the therapist fight this transference issue? Please understand the
dynamics. 99% of the alters in an Illuminati system are child alters.
Granted, that some professionals report working with alter systems that
they claim are 100% adults, but this only shows the limits of their
understanding of their client’s alter system. These child
alters
have NEVER had a parent. They have had cult figures who oversaw their
mind-control. They have had big giant adults in their life who have
manipulated and used them, but they have not had a genuine parent. The
therapist can and needs to perform the role of a loving parent for
these child alters so they can grow to maturity. The intense desire of
many therapists/ministers to integrate all alters again shows their
limited understanding of the situation. Hopefully this book (along with
our other books), by providing the details of what is going on, will
encourage relatives and outsiders to have more patience with therapists
who are not coming up with instant micro-wave-speed answers. Most of
the heavy programming traumas are done to the victim when they were a
child. Obviously, thousands of dissociated pieces of the mind which
have had no chance to experience life day-to-day as the host alter(s)
has, have had no chance to grow up. Integration of an entire system of
child alters who have not grown up is only asking for problems.
Integration of the real core with child alters is asking for problems.
The overall situation that trauma-based mind-control places the victim
and therapist in, is extremely complex and difficult. The victim will
transfer their feelings for their abusers to the therapist and support
team. What else can they do? As past traumas are uncovered, the victim
may even hallucinate during a drug memory abreaction and see the
therapist as the programmer. The therapist may say or wear things that
also
Page 328 ...
trigger transference. Depending upon how the various alters handled
abuse, may determine how the different alters then act when they
perceive the therapist as another abusive person. Again, this presents
another reason why support teams are worthwhile. Traditionally,
therapists have set spoken and unspoken limits to the time they will
give the victim. Therapists have limited time in two ways, one is the
amount of time per week, and the other is the length of treatment that
the therapist will devote to the victim before dropping him/her as a
client. If the client perceives that the overall treatment time is
limited, they will not raise the deeper issues. Because most clients
with mind-control only see their therapists for short periods of time,
they also can get by with letting the therapist only work on surface
issues. After having interacted with numerous mind-control victims and
therapists, the authors of this book have seen firsthand that most
therapists do not see a clear picture of what they are dealing with
DURING THE THERAPY TIME. Putnam admits in his book Diagnosis &
Treatment of Multiple Personality Disorder, (1989, p. 149), "I have
discovered, much to my chagrin, that many of my patients are very
different out in the world than they appear in my office." In fact, the
real secret sides of their clients are far more profoundly shocking
than most therapists up to now have been willing to imagine. The
therapists encourage the superficial approach mentioned above, because
many of the best professional therapists will not deal with anything
except the issues that the host or presenting alter brings up in the
therapy session. In other words, many professional therapists REFUSE to
guide the therapy. The client is then double-binded. The client is
somehow supposed to know the issues that they are programmed not to
know. It’s a "patient-diagnose-and-heal-yourself approach".
Amazing result do occur, because the mind doesn’t want to
face
its problems. The mind comes up with superficial solutions, declares
itself better and moves on. (Unfortunately, the mind-control continues,
only now it is simply better hidden.) A great deal has been written
about how clients sabotage therapy and double-bind their therapists.
The books that have covered this subject have not even begun to cover
this subject. Books could be written about this. But an even less
understood problem, is how the traditional therapeutic methods
double-bind the client. The traditional therapeutic/&
ministerial
methods are double-binding the clients from escaping the mind-control.
For instance within the Christian deliverance approach, if a client
fails to get an instant miraculous healing during a deliverance, then
they are told they lack faith, and they are told that without faith
they cannot heal. In other words, they must deny the problem if they
want the solution. Are the therapists (or support teams) willing to put
as much effort & attention into the victim as the Illuminati or
other programming cult? Except for minor exceptions, therapists have
NOT been willing to spend the same amount of time as the cult spends.
The Illuminati have Grande Dames that continue ongoing guidance for the
adult slaves. They also are willing to have their best programmers fly
in from Europe and other locations to reprogram a slave with the best
equipment and technology available. The commitment level by the
Illuminati to their slaves has up to now been many times greater than
any of the professionals. Don’t kid yourself that the slaves
don’t recognize this. That is why only superficial issues are
being dealt with. That is why so many slaves appear to be getting
better from the professionals, but the professionals are not being
eliminated from practicing. The original Mother-of-darkness who works
as a programming assistant with the head male programmer is putting in
trees
Page 329 ...
internally that are designed to last for the entire life of the slave.
That’s a long term commitment on the part of the programmers
and
their programming. The fruit (programs) that are placed upon the trees
(which are used as programming file systems), are to last the life of
the slave. The slave knows that the fruit has been given his internal
worlds for his lifetime. An example of a healthy productive role the
therapist can take would be the following: The therapist assures the
mind-control victim that they will have as much commitment to examining
and taking off the fruit, as the other side has of keeping the fruit in
place. The victim doesn’t know what the issues are, so the
therapist uses the back-door approach to let the victim learn about
themselves. The therapist asks, "What do you think about trees? Would
you spend the next week(s) drawing trees, talking to me about trees,
and going out and talking to trees. Please journal what you talk to the
trees about." The client may come back and say, "Trees are very
important to me. I don’t want to talk to anyone about trees.
Trees are very sacred to me, and they are deeply rooted in my mind, I
am their caretaker?" Then the therapist continues the backdoor
exploration, "What do you mean you are their caretaker?" Eventually,
the mind begins to unravel. The journaling can be an important vehicle
to track the unravelling of the mind. Due to the heavy infiltration
within the therapeutic community, some disinformation has been
assimilated into the beliefs of therapists. One of these is that
victims of mind control (who they call "survivors") shouldn’t
spend time together. Actually victims are able to understand each other
and trigger important information. They can be very helpful to each
other, once the host alter has done some basic stabilizing. Another
myth that the therapists hold to, is that the therapist will be
perceived as a benevolent caretaker by the victim and the Illuminati
will be perceived as abusers. Generally, it is quite the opposite. The
Illuminati have the ability to give pain, but they have the ability to
take it away. The therapist has the ability to give pain, but seldom
the ability nor the time to take the pain away. There often is little
closure to the mess therapists start, and most victims are very silent
about the struggles they go through, in part because they blame
themselves for problems. The master or handler is generally seen as a
benevolent dictator, a wonderful god, and a friend all rolled up into
one. The therapist, in order to maintain their aloof therapeutic role,
does not want to be a friend to the victim. They like to stay
emotionally distant, perhaps puffing on their pipe. The therapists are
still missing an obvious given, which is that most multiple
personalities have parents who are multiples.
Page 330 ...
COMMUNICATIONS ISSUES
Communication issues come in all shapes and sizes. The first that must
be dealt with, and which will never fade away, are the issues between
the victim and their therapist. The victim and therapist do not start
this marathon to communicate at the starting point. They must work hard
just to get to where most people begin. This is because the victim has
been betrayed by every important person in their life. Trust is the
foundation for communication, and before the therapist can establish a
shaky trust in the victim’s mind, little deep communication
will
occur. The victim must establish internal communication lines. This is
equivalent to trying to get a city of people to all like and talk to
each other. The answers to how a multiple can communicate with so many
diverse people should be used to help society at large. The same
answers that multiples have been discovering for their internal work,
could help society at large. Along with developing better internal
communication is the task of developing common goals and learning how
to control a system’s internal switching. Common goals and
control over one’s switching are major positive steps.
Initially,
an alter system will not have these. To develop cooperation in
switching will also relieve some of the tension that comes from alters
competing for the body. The next area of communication problems is in
the area of what alters present themselves when the therapist wants to
work, and which alters does the therapist work with. The temptation is
to get rid of troublemaking alters, but sometimes the troublemaking
alters are the ones the therapists really needs to work with. The
standard hour-long therapeutic session does not promote communication
with an alter session. Traditionally, alters will appear as the session
is closing, perhaps subconsciously hoping that their important
appearance will force the therapist to extend the therapy time. Many
therapists stick to their time schedules, and simply advise the alter
to appear at the next session. Many opportunities to develop lines of
communication are lost due to the limitations of the traditional one
hour session. Many alters only show up at special occasions, so a
support person who is around the system for long periods of time is in
a strategic position to really facilitate some good communication
developing. The programmed multiple’s system will almost
overwhelm the therapist when they find out that they have a listening
ear. The therapist will have an entire city of people wanting to give
their opinions and to voice their concerns. The needs of the alter
system are so great, that it is no wonder that many therapists have
terminated their clients because they feel overwhelmed at the
system’s need to be heard. What is breaking is a dam that has
held back in silence decades of severe abuse. In the best interest of
the overwhelmed therapist and the overwhelmed victim, we suggest
support teams deal with programmed multiples, because the issues really
demand that much help.
Page 331 ...
DENIAL, how to deal with the therapists or ministers
A popular question with ministers who have not worked in the area of
programmed DID’s is, "Why doesn’t God have an
instant
miracle for these people?" There are many parts to the answer, but
before getting into the answer, perhaps these ministers should ask
Almighty God why he has not chosen simplistic answers to so many things
in life. If a room full of smokers are prayed for by any minister, how
many will no longer be smoking in a month’s time? Smoking is
a
trivial mild addiction compared to the programmed of a complex
programmed multiple. Those ministers who ask this question need to ask
themselves if God is so powerful and they know how to pray, why
haven’t they themselves cleared out this nation’s
hospitals. The traumas that have put people in hospitals are generally
mild compared to the programming traumas. While most licensed
therapists are in denial that the systematic programming of thousands
of infants is going on in this nation, and that SRA exists, if they
look at history every element of the programming has been carried out
and historically documented. Should we automatically dismiss any
suggestion that those in authority may occasionally conspire to
obfuscate the truth? Consider this, most people can barely make it
through the day at work without engaging in what are effectively low
grade conspiracies. Perhaps they tacitly agree with another coworker
not to report the co-workers misbehavior to the boss. So why should we
expect things to be different in the corridors of power? addresses and
locations) and think to ourselves how many millions of people are
practicing witchcraft today--doesn’t it seem incredible that
the
FBI doesn’t believe any of these witches are capable of
killing
someone for their religious beliefs. Christians, Moslems, and Jews are
capable of killing for their religious beliefs, but somehow the FBI
thinks witches are incapable? Doesn’t that smack of a
cover-up?
The victim doesn’t have time to deal with bull-headed
counselors
who are in denial. The denial could be a sign that the therapist are
mixed up in the world-wide satanic conspiracy him or herself. The
victim should not try to convince the therapist about what is
happening, the victim should find a listening ear, and take their needs
for help somewhere where they will get real attention. Every major and
most minor religious group in history have had members that have killed
other humans. And yet the FBI officially claims that SRA
doesn’t
exist. If we look at the list of thousands of covens (and our co-author
Fritz has many of their
Page 332 ...
DEPRESSION (initial client complaint)
Depression is mentioned, because the original complaint of many victims
of total mind-control is a depression that they can’t figure
out.
Depression comes in different types. What the therapist wants to
identify is a. what kind of depression is occurring and b. what are the
causes of the depression and c. what kind of treatment modalities can
be applied. Often depression will be experienced as a feeling of
defeat, or a feeling of a loss, or a feeling of no hope. Sometimes
depression is a symptom of programming going off of a total
mind-controlled slave. If this is the case, unless the client is well
into therapy for his or her DID (MPD), the client will rarely have a
clue about the real source. Some drugs have the effect or side-effect
of causing depression. These include codeine, high-blood pressure
medicines, indomethacin, steroids, and tranquilizers. The client should
mention what medicine they are taking, and the side-effects of these
noticed. Sometimes clients with depression can get involved in physical
activities and get involved with others and this will clear up a
depression. Sometimes clients can determine the underlying spiritual
problems and significantly help their depression by working on root
spiritual problems or doing a deliverance. A few proper questions will
soon discover if there are root spiritual problems causing the
depression. If the person had a breakdown of communication with their
parents, this will eventually if not corrected lead to open rebellion,
and then several steps later this will lead to a suicidal depression.
The original sequence of events was created by the lack of trustworthy
communication by the person’s parents and needs to be
addressed
at that level to pull it out by the roots. Sometimes depression is
simply a reaction to a sad event. This is not likely to cause someone
to come to a therapist, but such a triggering event should be ruled out
if other causes are to be treated. One of the most effective ways of
dealing with depression is to realize how it is a lack of faith and a
selfish self-focus and a sin toward God, who will provide just what we
need in life. If the client is open to seeing that depression is a sin,
then this sin can be confessed, and all spirits attached to it
delivered from the person. If the client is a total mind-controlled
slave, the front alters may get some relief from such a miniature
deliverance, but will still need to address the deeper problems. The
therapist can administer to the client a dissociation test, to
determine if the client may have been a candidate for total
mind-control. If the client tests positive, then the therapist will
need to do follow up work. Causes for this depression may be very deep
rooted & take some serious long term investigation and work.
The
therapist can also serve in the role of listener. If the client gets
some of his pent-up emotions & problems out, he may feel some
relief. If the client sees that someone cares, that can also have a
positive effect. The client can also be encouraged to talk about the
situation to another trusted person. The therapist will want to find
out what kind of support system (team) can be used to help the client.
Page 333
depression.jpg
Page 334 ...
DETECTION OF MIND-CONTROL
The therapist, the victim and others have several avenues they can use
to detect mind-control. One avenue in diagnosing mind-control which has
not been touched upon by the professional psychiatric literature is to
look at the subject’s role in life. The reason that the
professional literature is unable to discuss this avenue, is because
the professionals have had very little understanding about how the
World Order is constructed and ran. In fact we were thankful that God
brought into our life, one of the few outsiders that had a grasp of how
the Illuminati controls the world. An understanding of how the
Illuminati uses front organizations, what those organizations are, how
they interlock, and how control over the various sectors of life is
managed by the Illuminati would greatly help therapists identify people
who have to be Illuminati members. It is an extremely high chance that
Illuminati members are multiples, and an even higher chance that they
are under some form of mind-control. Even John DuPont, who recently was
head of the DuPont family, was plagued by implants. To identify people
under mind-control see if they are people with specialized training.
Next, identify if they are in a highly structured job, where there is
no room for grey--everything is black or white. Multiples do very well
in positions that call for black or white, structured thinking. Look
for educators in principal positions, reform schools, catholic and
military schools, boy and girl schools. These are places that the
Illuminati control in order to use them for auxiliary programming
centers. Many of your porn stars, some of your movie actors, almost all
of your brain surgeons, some of your CPAs, many of your politicians,
all of your CIA field agents, and most of your religious leaders are
under trauma-based mind-control. If you actually have the subject come
in for an interview, ask questions about the person’s
personal
history. The host alters of multiples have some very typical methods of
handling personal history questions. Don’t expect the host to
make it easy for you to determine that they are a multiple. What you
can expect is that you will have a difficult time with most multiples
of getting a coherent history of their life. You may discover
contradictory information in what they tell you. For instance, one
multiple that we interviewed said his father was a. a nazi submarine
captain, b. a jewish scientist that worked on the Montauk project from
1941 onwards. The information was obviously contradictory and
contradicted what his ex-wife said about his father. The personal
history contradictions of many multiples won’t be this
dramatic,
but they might be. When the host personality remembers the details of
their life they may say, "they tell me that... Frequently, a person
won’t remember if a detail happened before or after another
event
in their childhood. If you find chronological problems and frequent
inconsistencies, then you can highly suspect DID. But you must
continue. The MPD really is apparent, when there are lots of specific
differences between the therapist and the subject in how they remember
what the client has said. The different episodes are hard for the
multiple to remember although they are confident of their perception of
the event. The dissociative thinking makes it very difficult for the
multiple to see the differences, and they will be very convinced that
the therapist is trying to deceive them. The experience can be
frustrating for both parties, but it is one more red flag that
indicates that mind-control is likely present. Multiples will
frequently explain their
Page 335 ...
lack of detailed memories on having a "poor memory". They will often
say, "I don’t remember", which is truthful, and is better
than
the occasional situation where some multiples try to invent something
to say to hide their lack of personal information, or to placate the
wishes of the interviewer. They are also great at saying nothing but
sounding like they have said something, and another trick multiples
have is saying something that appears to be one thing but is another.
Some multiples have figured out their multiplicity, but are secret
about it, in fear that others will think that they are crazy. Over the
years, probably many more times than not the professional psychiatrists
and psychologists have misdiagnosed MPD. Some of their favorite
disorders to use when misdiagnosing are: Adjustment, Affective,
Anxiety, Bi-Polar Affective, Borderline, Drug Abuse, Eating, Histronic,
Organic Mental, Paranoid Schizophrenia, PTS, Psychosis,
Schizoaffective, Somatization, and Transient Amnesia. When multiples
takes an MMPI, they have historically answered the same way a
schizophrenic answers on items 156 & 251. (At least 3 studies
have
documented this.) These two questions elevate the Sc scale which has
been taken to indicate schizophrenia. Some of the tipoffs that a person
is misdiagnosed in a mental hospital is that the interact a lot with
the staff, but have erratic behavior, that generally leads to the staff
being upset. They may be responsible for a while and then surprise
everyone by not being able to function or handle a responsibility.
Typical questions that help the therapist expose the programmed DID
include questions about whether their school grades were erratic,
whether they have gaps in their memories of school days, if they
remember getting test results on tests that they don’t
remember
taking, and a grade-by-grade year-by-year history of their life. Bear
in mind, that the programmers are trying to fine-tune the programming
by layering in cover memories. Still an experienced therapist should be
able to see through the shallowness and the confusion of cover
memories. Mind-control comes in many appearances. With the more recent
victims, implants are being used to distract victims from realizing
their DID (MPD). The detection of MPD (DID) underneath the incessant
manipulations and voices of the implants is a challenge. The "noise"
created by the implants is a strong dissociating mechanism. There are
strong natural defenses of the mind that the programmers count on to
keep the mind-control hidden. For instance, the victim has been bonded
to the programmer/master. To admit mind-control is to experience
abandonment, and even death (because many alters’
self-identity
is wrapped up with the perpetrator.) It is not easy to kill oneself,
which is often the mind’s perception of what admitting
mind-control is. Detection of trauma-based mind-control by the
therapist will usually encounter strong denial mechanisms by the
victim. The therapist should ask about flashbacks. If the client
reports flashbacks that are not drug-related flashbacks that is a good
sign that MPD may be present. However, most flashbacks do not begin
suff acing until the programming and dissociation begins crumbling.
Some undetected adult victims of mind-control, when they are having sex
with their spouses get intrusive flashbacks and images that scare them.
This is another red-flag that the person may be a victim of
mind-control. Victims of mind-control will often have all kinds of
issues around relationships and sex. Another red flag is when a person
reports abilities or information that they have no idea where it has
come from. For instance, all of a sudden one day they could
Page 336 ...
understand someone speaking German, or all of a sudden they got the
words to a song, or all of a sudden they just intuitively knew how to
play a piano, etc. The opposite of this also hits DID mind-control
victims. They may have an ability that somehow strangely disappears. It
takes time to realize that these are co-conscious alters. Victims of
mind-control have great survival mechanisms. They are experts at
changing the conversation to hide what they don’t want to
talk
about. If the therapist has the skill at being gently but firmly
assertive in getting what they want, the ability to be gently
persistent can pay off.
The therapist needs to become acquainted with detecting alter switches.
This involves eye shape changes, eye color changes, eye movement
changes, blinks, body posture changes, voice pitch changes, word usage
changes, perception and value changes, mood changes, etc. Upon
detection of this, the therapist may gently ask, "Do you ever feel that
there is another part of yourself that comes out and does things that
you would not do?" "Do you ever feel that when you are alone, someone
else or some other part of you is watching you?" Any answer except a
definite "no" is a red flag, that reconfirms the switching clues, and
other clues that the therapist has assembled. Not all victims of
mind-control have extensive alter systems. In our previous books, we
have covered situations when this does not occur. Another way that
therapists can determine mind-control would be to interview people
close to the victim, and to visit the victim’s work place and
home. Some victims of mind-control surround themselves with objects
that pertain to their programming. For instance, the therapist may find
a man who has a passion for Mickey Mouse objects, or a woman who loves
white rabbit figurines or star trek objects.
Page 337 ...
EATING DISORDERS (as an Initial problem, and as a Deeper Issue)
AN INTRODUCTION
Eating disorders exhibit themselves as initial problems for victims
coming in for therapy. For instance, they may find themselves having an
irresistible urge to overeating followed by vomiting or purging, or
they may be starving themselves, or have phobias around certain foods.
Eating disorders also may develop as problems as the system of alters
work through their memories and programming. These eating problems do
have the possibility of becoming life-threatening. Many victims of
mind-control suffer from eating disorders. There are certainly many
factors which cause mind-control victims eating disorders. The more
difficult disorders which resist treatment are often created by
multiple factors. This section will make an attempt to provide the
therapist some of important factors behind eating disorders of
mind-control victims. Eating disorders are not limited to victims of
mind-control. However, many individuals who are referred or on their
own come in to therapists for bulimia or anorexia, are actually
suffering from the severe effects of trauma-based total mind-control.
For some therapists, the first primary complaint of mind-control
victims will be their eating disorder. They will be totally oblivious
that anything else could be wrong. Researchers who like to work with
statistics have noticed that there is a high incidence of people with
eating disorders who have problems with abuse, depression, and
self-identity. Since mind-control will bring with it abuse, depression
and self-identity problems it is a given that the mind-control victim
will have some eating problems at some level of their being. Modern
American culture as well as many of the slave handlers are obsessed
with females being thin. The pressure that females feel from society
and their handlers that they are "a "dog" unless they...." makes many
slaves identify thinness with overcoming their self-esteem problems.
Unfortunately, if the host pursues starvation thinking that it will
overcome low-self esteem, they almost always are disappointed that it
doesn’t help, and if anything, starvation, only exacerbates
the
original low self-esteem. On the flip side, in order for the host alter
to feel that she has some control over just one thing in her life, she
may resort to starving herself to regain some sense of power over her
own body. When striving for freedom, the mind may think that starvation
gives at least a fraction of power over their body, after it has been
stripped of choice, beaten, and raped, and electroshocked. One reason
why some bulimics and anorexics have eating disorders is that they have
difficulty identifying their feelings, and have little confidence in
their ability in relationships. They feel they must do the right thing
to avoid disapproval and rejection. They have an artificial idealized
image of what they should be. For instance, one teenage girl was
frightened that she was changing from a girl to a woman. Others due to
their abuse have a hatred of their body, as well as a fear. There are
some young altars that may not want to have breasts and hips. Another
person felt that they were naughty if they ate, and she became
increasingly disgusted with herself as she ate.
WHEN MIND-CONTROL VICTIMS WITH EATING DISORDERS FIRST COME IN CONTACT
WITH THERAPISTS
One way victims come in to therapy is that they are referred by someone
for their eating disorder. Anyone who gets a referral should explain
clearly why the person is in for a consultation. If the client is
living at
Page 338 ...
home, it goes almost without saying that the support team should
explore with the client the possibility of someone supportive from the
family participating in the consultation phase of things, so that a
more complete evaluation can be obtained. Another frequent scenario is
when a female mind-control victim is raped during the normal course of
life and it triggers their mind to remember previous sexual trauma.
This may kick off an eating disorder, which may drive the person to
come in for therapy. Because the problem is not really an eating
disorder, the person doesn’t have a clue as to what they are
stepping into by asking for therapy. If someone is trying to trick a
person into coming in for treatment, experience shows the tricking will
quite consistently backfire in the long run. Rather, than scheming
behind the victim’s back, the therapist should see if there
are
good support groups in the area. After the victim or the victim
&
their family experience a support group, they are often more willing to
come into therapy. Depending on the situation, getting the victim in to
work on their eating disorder may even be perceived by the
slave’s handler as a positive, rather than a threat to his
control, because it may be helping to stabilize a problem within the
slave. The patient with an eating disorder is often going to be
resistant, embarrassed, and apprehensive. The therapist can establish
rapport by being warm, acceptable, honest, empathetic, and interested.
Different people will click with different therapists, for instance,
teenage girls often prefer female therapists. This is where teams are
beneficial, where one person can act more as a consultant, which the
therapist who has rapport can deal with the person on a longer basis.
(Therapists can establish report by using the language of the person,
mirroring where they are at, etc.) If the therapist is going to try
dealing with only the eating disorder, there are several approaches
that can be taken. However, whichever path the therapist goes down, it
would be advisable to gather an understanding of what is going on.
Whether it is bulimia or anorexia, the therapist will ask the person to
describe their eating patterns both during the week and the weekend.
There are ways to get information from people which use the "back-door"
so-to-speak. For instance, if the person has been referred for binge
eating but won’t openly discuss it, the therapist might ask,
"When people go on a diet to lose weight, they sometimes feel so hungry
that they are tempted to eat a whole lot. Have you experienced that?"
If the person is not forthcoming about vomiting, a gentle back-door
approach might be, "Have you ever tried to lose weight by any other
means?" It is important to track the details around the episodes--such
as how often, when, the most common times they occur, how long they
last and the types and amounts of food eaten. It is also important to
note what thoughts and feelings were attached to the various episodes.
Don’t be surprised if the person doesn’t say, "I
don’t know why I did it." The therapist can ask, "How do you
view
that particular food?" It could be that the cool-aid triggers the mind
to think of blood. It could be that raw meat triggers the
person’s mind to think of sacrifices. It could be that
certain
smells relate to certain traumas. Vomiting may have a cleansing effect
on the mind of person coming in for therapy.
The therapist may also ask the person about their thoughts and feelings
related to sex, and whether they are interested in sex. This may
provide some significant clues as to what one is really dealing with.
What is the image of the person
Page 339 ...
concerning her or his body? Later, as one deals with more than the host
personality, this will continue to be an issue. With initial clients
suffering mind-control, the therapist will need to ask the full range
of questions, such as asking about symptoms of depression, low
motivation, panic attacks, sleep problems, feelings of suicide and
hopelessness, and feelings of being trapped or worthless. The full
range of initial intake questions will need to be dealt with such as
levels of dissociation, compulsive behaviors, addictions, psychotic
thoughts, etc. Therapists can save time if they want by using some of
the standard evaluations that other professionals have developed for
interviews. For eating disorders there are for instance:
· Garner & Garfunkel’s Eating Attitudes
Test,
· Johnson’s Diagnostic Survey for Eating Disorders
· Structure Clinical Interview according to the
DSM’s
section on eating disorders. Therapists may also want to use such
interviews as
· Diagnostic Interview Schedule for Children by Costello et.
al.
· Beck’s Depression Inventory
It almost goes without saying that Eating Disorders come from a complex
array of factors, including such possible problems like structural
brain illness, an infection, or endocrine malfunction. It is not
possible for this book to provide detailed information on these other
possible causes. The therapist needs to get a feel for what is
happening, for what the therapist is qualified to do, and if need be,
get the client to someone who specializes in what the client needs help
in. What this section can help with is in providing insights into
eating disorders as they relate to mind-control victims, and their
programming, their programming-traumas, memories, and the general
side-effects of a life-time of abuse.
Page 340 ...
EVALUATION FORMS
PURPOSE & SHORTCOMINGS
Evaluation forms are nice crutches in some situations. In a formal
therapeutic situation where time is of the essense, forms can be given
that will decrease the time that the therapist needs to begin gaining a
feel about the new client’s situation. We have provided an
excellent form on the next page that will take approximately 5 minutes
to fill out. It is a non-threatening "Getting to Know You Better" form,
which can help lead into deeper discussions. The therapist could make a
cup of tea for the client while the new client fills it out. Another
way that forms might help is where a non-professional counsellor or
friend is trying to get some better clues as to what the
subject’s problems are. Another benefit of forms is that it
desensitizes questions that otherwise might make the subject feel
defensive, because the subject’s mind can see that the
question
is simply a standard question on a standard form, and not a personal
attack. In dynamic counselling sessions, a good therapist will be
sensing and asking questions in a dynamic manner that is responding to
the cues and clues that the subject is providing. Obviously, the
dynamic approach when done by an experienced person who knows what he
is looking for is much quicker, much more appropriate, and better
tailored for the victim’s situation. If you were
interrogating a
P.O.W. which would be more effective? to go by a list of questions in a
book, or to ask questions in a dialogue between the interogator and
P.O.W.? Likewise, an interview on television by Barbara Walters will be
well thought out, but will still have an element of dynamic
interaction. Likewise, there is no substitute for a live dialogue
between a therapist and their new client. In a dynamic evaluations, the
entire procedure is a skill. However, there are several areas that will
be probed.
SAMPLE QUESTIONS IN AREAS OF INQUIRY
· For instance, "Have you ever lost time?" The counsellor is
careful not to define time, and will see how many examples the person
provides. If the person doesn’t provide examples, the
counsellor
might say,
"By losing time I mean to look at the clock at 9 o’clock and
the
next thing you realize is that its 4 o’clock." During periods
of
boredom or extreme concentration most people will lose track of time,
but in the case of multiples they often have frequent lost periods of
time. However, we want to remind the reader that back-up amnesia (you
forget that you forgot) will cover much of the time lost.
· "Do you remember calling yourself other names or having
other people call you other names?"
· Another area that can be probed are questions around
depersonalization and derealization, such as "Have you ever had the
feeling you were looking at someone else in your place [or at yourself
from a distance]?"
· Another area is to ask specific questions about their
family
history, such as "Tell me about the first five years of your life, the
significant things you remember such as your home life, your friends,
your relatives, and starting to school. Be very thorough and give
examples of how you interacted with the important people in your life."
This is to determine how fragmented their memories are. The Illuminati
are trying to give people cover memories but these cover histories are
still not as tight and real as most people’s.
· "When do your memories become continous?"
· Inquiries can be made to see if the person has been
connected
to any of the groups who were exposed in Vol. 2 or any of the
bloodlines exposed in Vol. 1. "Did anyone in your family ever belong to
a government agency, or the Freemasons?" "Do you know your
family’s background or genealogy?"
· "Do you sometimes hear voices in your head, or does
someone
answer you when you talk out loud when alone?" Such questions are so
direct that the host alter may deflect them, rather than open up.
· "Are there certain times of the year which feel unsafe for
you?"
EARLY WORK
Some of the better therapists, when they suspect MPD, like to make
their initial question and answer session lengthy, in order to wear the
host alter down and make switching a sure thing. An alter system can
prevent switching over a short period, but over a several hour session,
the skilled therapist will work with the system enough that switches
will begin to occur. After getting some history from the client, the
skilled therapist can teach the client how to put memories on a screen
and then can go back to a significant early point in the
person’s
life and begin working dynamically with the event.
Page 341
NAME ___________________________________________________
Address ___________________________________________________
Fill in circle on items that pertain to you
o Abused as a child
o Adopted
o A failure
o Anxiety attacks
o Army brat
o Auto accident
o Bad habits
o Black & white thinking
o Blackouts
o Class President
o Compulsive activities & behaviors
o Depressed
o ESP
o Erotic dancer
o Ex-member of a cult
o Extrovert
o Feelings of being choked
o Feelings of being isolated
o Forgetful
o Flashbacks
o Genius in family
o Good grades in school
o Great faith in God
o Have a twin
o Have an imaginary playmate
o Have several close non-sexual friends of the opposite sex.
o Headaches
o Inability to believe in God
o Insomnia
o Intelligent
o Interest in the occult
o Irrational anger
o Knew what you were going to be as a child
o Little trust in other people
o Love Disney movies
o Love Star Wars
o Love to collect (or hoard)
o Loving
o Minister for a father (or mother)
o Moody
o Multiple Sclerosis
o Never dishonest
o Nightmares
o Panic attacks
o Participant in a religion
o Perfect father
o Phobias
o Physically attacked
o Premature sexual development
o Restlessness
o Rich parents
o Secretive
o Serious Health problems
o Single
o Skipped school
o Strange clothes in closet
o Strange pains with no explanation
o Strange voices
o Sudden attitude changes
o Supernatural experiences
o Tonsillectomy, emergency
o Tried narcotics
o Trouble learning in school
o UFO abductions
o Unable to enjoy sex
o Unexplainable things in personal life
o Visions
o Very vigilant
o Work for the Government
Page 342 ...
FEAR, how to handle
Fear can be triggered by senses, such as smelling smoke. There is a
powerful spiritual dimension that works with the mental dynamics.
Thoughts are powerful things, if -thoughts of fear are allowed to take
root they will grow and spread. The spirit of Fear paralyzes many
victims and many support team members from dealing with what needs to
be done. Fear can be compared to dandelions in a yard, they spring up
everywhere and they are so hard to weed out and to dig up by the roots.
Fear clouds the mind of person, so that the higher areas of thinking
shut down. Before long, the victim of fear is making unwise decisions
and becoming a wimp. One of the best reasons for a person to dump their
fear is that the enemy watches for fear and tries to give exactly that
thing that the person fears. The fear becomes a magnet attacting the
very thing that the fearful person is dreading. (The abusers are
trained to key in & identify fears.) The Spirit of the Lord
brings
boldness and a sound mind (cf. 2 TIM 1:7), but the Spirit of Fear
brings a curse. Fear has at its foundation, the preservation of life.
But we are warned in scripture that if we attempt to save our life we
will lose it, but if we give to God what we can not keep to gain what
we cannot lose, then we have made a wise choice. In other -words, fear
has at its foundation death. The ancient wisdom of Prov. 18:2 1 says,
"Death and life are in the power of the tongue; and they that love it
shall eat the fruit thereof." Some people choose death and call in the
spirits that support an agenda of death. Fear is on that death team.
Fear creates a mental bondage. Fear is often the underlying reason
behind many of our bondages, such as cigarettes, drugs, overeating, and
stealing. People think, "If I don’t do this, then such and
such
will happen to me." "If I don’t steal, I’ll
starve." "If I
don’t do drugs, I won’t be able to mellow out and
face
life." "If I don’t smoke cigarettes, I won’t stay
calm and
thin."
Secular therapists do not want to hear that fear is a spiritual
problem. But recognition that it is a spiritual problem is important,
because the answers to fear which is hope and trust are spiritual
answers. What gave the shepherd boy David the courage to face Goliath
without fear? Was it because he was hypnotically worked on by a
therapist? Did he visualize and through self-hypnosis convince himself
that he could beat Goliath? No, he defeated Goliath because he had a
spiritual reason to confront Goliath, "...For who is this uncircumcised
Philistine, that he should defy the armies of the living God." 2 SAM
17:26
The cold hard facts of the matter is that Fear is a lack of trust in
God. God certainly cuts us a great deal of slack. But if you are "in
Christ" you are in His protection, and He has promised that "I will
never leave or forsake you." HEB 13:5 Doubts about God lead to fears.
Because fear is a lack of faith, Fear opens a portal, a legal foothold
for Satan to bring what we fear into our life. God must respect this
free will choice on our part to doubt His grace. God can spiritually
protect us, but when we fear, we remove by our own free will
God’s protection because we have called into question His
Word.
We can see this spiritual law working clear back in the oldest book of
the Bible, Job 3:5, "For the thing which I greatly feared is come upon
me, and that which I was afraid of is come unto me." When Job feared,
Satan used that to go before God and petition for the right to torment
Job in those ways. God was only respecting Job’s freedom of
choice, when He allowed Satan to torment Job. But God did turn that
negative into a positive, because even though Job had some fear, he was
a righteous man. Each person must resolve not to be in bondage to fear
again. It is one thing to be have foresights and concerns, but when we
speak of fear, we are speaking of when the survival part of the brain
clicks in, and the higher parts of the brain start shutting down.
Understanding how deeply God wants to help us, the magnitude of His
abilities & promises to help us, will help us refuse the Spirit
of
Fear.
Page 343 ...
FEAR, what f. issues do victims have? (f. is an initial issue for
victims)
Traumas are applied as a base to lay in the programming. They work
because of the victim’s fear. The more types of programming,
the
more types of fear. Victims, who have the older programming or
excessive programming will exhibit more phobias than the normal person.
Victims of mind-control will, for instance, often fear water (drowning
tortures), heights (torture over cliffs, & down wells), fire
(fire
tortures & traum-as), noises (from programming tortures), black
birds (from their programming significance), red kool-aid (from ritual
programming events), etc. The victim must also fear their abusers.
These fears concern issues such as: being reaccessed, being
reprogrammed, receiving a traitor’s death, losing someone
close
as punishment, being publicly defamed & losing their
occupation.
The victim will quite often fear losing the approval or "love" of the
abuser if he/she faces the truth about the abuse. The victim will also
fear their own mind: the fear of the unknown, the fear of knowing the
truth, the fear that they won’t differentiate between tricks,
cover programs, false memories laid in by programming and what actually
happened, and the fear of the never ending pain. The victim’s
alters who want to move toward health will fear the internal programs,
the mazes, the vortices, the traps in the mind, as well as alters who
are abusive to the body & alters who have internalized the
roles of
the abusers, such as judge alters. The victim will also fear the heavy
demonization that controls their lives, as well as experiencing the
heavy fears that the demons instill within them. The victim will fear
their support team, because they have only experienced betrayal from
their past significant people. The victim will fear that he will not be
believed, that he will not be loved, that he will express too much
fear, anger, or strange happenings and be rejected. He may even fear
that the therapist will lock him up if the truth comes out. Because of
the way a system of alters is created, the front alters may be able to
dissociate from some of these fears, & put on a very good
front.
Once the therapist scratches below the surface, he will uncover lots of
unresolved issues & tidal waves of fear that roll through a
system
of alters. Many victims of mind-control fear there is no hope. This
fear incapacitates them. This fear has been developed in the
victim’s mind by programming scenarios where the Network
makes
the slave feel they are always being watched, and that any thought or
action of betrayal will be immediately known by the abusers. FEAR robs
the victim of moving toward freedom, working on issues, learning from
their internal world, working with their support team in a positive
manner, and of enjoying life. Perhaps the largest thing FEAR robs from
victims is HOPE. While God & His perfect love cast out fear,
fear
has a way of driving away the work of God in a person’s life,
incl. an unhealthy fear of God. Fear is the opposite of faith &
trust in God. To deny one’s problems does not equal faith.
Neither fear of problems, nor denial of problems is faith. Both are a
lack of faith. Faith means to believe that there are answers and to
continue pressing on until answers arrive or are discovered. Faith is
directly connected to our trust that God is good and will reward good
things to His creation. God will prove Himself to those who trust Him.
"Oh, taste the Lord and know that He is good." In the previous article
fear was dealt with as a spiritual issue, which it is primarily.
However, it can be treated from other angles too. For instance, the
book Kicking the Fear Habit by Manuel J. Smith (Dial Press, NY:NY,
1977) treats fear as a Behavior Mod, problem.
Page 344 ...
1. ASSOCIATIONS with BAD MEMORIES (TRIGGERS) which could include fear
of: water, heights, fire, noises, animals, foods.
2. Things the ABUSERS might do, which could include the fear of:
rejection, reprisals, reaccessing, and reprogramming.
3. Things the VICTIM will do to him or her self, which could include:
falling into internal mind----traps, failing to get the truth, finding
out the truth, never getting rid of the pain or guilt, having to be
subjected
to demons, having to go into the unknown.
4. the SUPERNATURAL, which could include: Almighty God, demons, aliens,
& what they consider to be their destiny.
5. the FUTURE, which could include: the coming New World Order, that
there is no hope, that there are no answers, & the fear of an
alien
takeover.
6. the SUPPORT TEAM, which could include: the fear of not being
believed, the fear of not being understood in the complexity of a
programmed multiple, the fear of betrayal, the fear of rejection, and
the
fear of hurting others.
PROBLEMS FEAR CREATES:
1. INCAPACITATES the Victim to work on issues.
2. MAKES IT DIFFICULT for the support team.
3. ROBS the victim of the joys and pleasures of life.
FEAR interlocks with many other issues that will be discussed in this
book. It is a pervasive problem that interlocks with many other issues.
It is not a single issue that can be easily cast out like a trick knot
that can be undone by a clever pull, but is a serious series of
emotional knots that will take persistent undoing. There are so many
fear issues, that this is one reason it is impera-tive to get the
victim to a safe place to reduce their fears to a working level. Along
that line, a safe place is best which has the minimum of fear triggers
in their life. Sometimes it is helpful for clients to understand the
dynamics of fear. There are fear reduc-tion therapies that can be
applied to specific phobias which may allow the victim to function
freer.
Page 345 ...
HOPE
"How can I get better?" It’s the common question. Even deeper
is
the question, "Can I get better?" There are plenty of people who are
willing to offer false hopes. If we are to discuss HOPE, we must also
be willing to be honest and frank, and not offer placebos. Victims of
mind-control have been lied to --enough, they don’t need to
be
given false hopes. There are two types of mind-control victims, those
who have their humaness totally snuffed out and are simply robots that
function in order to survive, and those who have a tiny spark of their
original life still tucked away somewhere within themselves. For us
that tiny spark or original humaness would show itself when we secretly
prayed to God that he would save the victims we were assigned to
program. We gave tiny mustard seeds to those that we helped program in
hopes that that mustard seed of faith would free them some day. We
tried to weaken the programming with those who were strong minded
enough to possibly break free someday. We did our job, but quietly
within us, was still a spark of humaness (or one can also call it
hope). It is that spark of hope that the Illuminati try so hard to
snatch. If they can accomplish killing that residual spark of hope,
then they will work hard to keep their victim alive, because they know
that they now have a robot. The humaness (the hope) has died, or at
best is totally apathetic. The child himself becomes apathetic, and
quits looking for hope. It only functions in order to survive. In our
experience in the Illuminati, there is no doubt that God was there with
some children. Most everyone is aware that Jesus Christ came to destroy
the works of the devil (1 JN 3:18). Our life is testimony that the
power of Christ to perform miracles is not dead, no matter how much the
Illuminati scoff at it. With some children it seemed God had drawn a
line, and Satan could not go past that line. Some child victims had as
much as three God-given guardian angels. God has kept a spark of hope
alive in some of the mind-control victims out there, in spite of the
incredible amount of sophisticated torture and mind-control that they
have had to endure. Our system would define hope for a mind-control
victim this way: hope is when a piece of the child has not sold out to
the Illuminati. God will take that piece and even though the victim is
in darkness, God will take that spark of life and He will work with it.
If there is any light, God is in a position to raise that light up.
When God brings a person into a victim’s life who sincerely
cares, and loves and is committed to helping the victim, somehow an
appreciation for that love and committment reaches down deep into the
person’s mind, and helps that spark of hope grow into a
flame.
Even though the victim does not understand what is happening, they will
grab ahold of that help with a strangle hold. The person who wants to
help can encourage the victim to tap into that survivor instinct, that
strength that they have to survive, that survivor spirit that they had
to have to endure the brutal trauma-based mind-control, and apply that
spirit of survival to their fight for freedom. Go back to the hope that
kept them alive. Without hope, the victim is not going to fight the
pain and the programming to get free. The victim has come from a world
with little hope. If the victim can not consciously see hope, the
support person can keep their hope safe for them, and help them to see
that there is a tunnel and the tunnel has a light at the end of the
tunnel. We can pray that God will reveal to us the roots of our
slavery. We can pray that Almighty God’s spirit would breathe
the
life-giving medicine of His Spirit of Life into us.
Page 346 ...
We know that God can seem awfully distant and aloof. We know the fear
that comes from looking in the mirror and on one hand seeing an old
person and on the other seeing a young person. Reality seems such a
drag. All the trivial headaches add up to one big pot that is boiling
over. This is where a prayer for an inner transformation of joy can
bless a person. The realization that God does care, can lift a great
deal of the burdens of reality. This is where a walk out in the
sunshine through a park, where we experience the beauty of creation can
remind us that life does contain many beautiful things. If a person is
in a pitch black room, groping for the door handle in total darkness,
it is very easy to panic and believe that one will never get out. Once
the person has reached the door handle, even though they do not have it
opened, there is a way for that door to open. If the mind-control
victim has reached someone who cares and understands how to help them,
then they have reached befudled therapist is going to help them. There
is a creative power for good in this universe, call it what you want,
but know that this power comes from a good Creator that loved His
creation, and that He has put time limits on how long evil can exist.
There is coming a time when evil will be abolished. Until that time we
can know that Almighty God has the power to turn any evil into good,
and one of the proofs of this is the life, death and resurrection of
Christ. God has high hopes for us. His disciples were so excited about
this good news, they were willing to die for it. We are excited about
giving hope to others, enough that we are also willing to pay that
final price. that door knob. They need to hang on and know that when
that door swings open, it will surprise everyone. The door seems stuck,
but it can open. When we are in the dark, let us call out to the God of
Comfort who can see us in the dark. A victim of mind-control when he or
she regains freedom has a noble and powerful ministry available to
them. Who else can listen to and look at another survivor of
mind-control abuse and convey deep empathy without saying a word. God
has great things that He wants to do with your future. We must not let
the enemy steal our hope, as he has tried so hard to do over the years.
We spoke up before a conference of therapists and gave our testimony
that Jesus Christ brought us freedom. We want to encourage therapists
to see that a victim needs to have a hope that a power stronger than
themselves and stronger than the
Page 347 ...
INITIAL QUESTIONAIRE
Does the client have?
a. dissociative behavior (see checklist pg.
b. intrusive thoughts
c. physical complaints with no medical reasons
d. relatives in any intelligence organization
e. relatives associated with perpetrator groups (see list Vol. 2 pg.)
-------- IF NO TO ALL OF THESE, LOOK F0R SOMETHING ELSE
f. memory lapses unexplained by ordinary forgetfulness
g. UFO or alien experiences
h. the presence of childhood trauma’s in one’s life
i. feelings like there is more than one person (or voice) inside
IF YES, GO ON TO THE QUESTIONAIRE BELOW
Has the client?
a. ever lost time
b. found strange items in their closet
c. heard words by others associated with mind control
d. uncontrollable behavior despite strong efforts to control it
e. relatives who belong to Illuminati or elite bloodlines
f. unexplainable scars (when examined under a black light)
g. heard voices
h. a feeling of being possessed by some power, or a living, dead or
evil person.
i. unexplainable bruises
j. been adopted, lived in a foster home or orphanage
YES
Are there?
a. strange reactions by what seem to be total strangers
b. unexplainalbe fluctuations of skills and abilities
c. intelligent parents with a wide disparity of abilities between them
& the client
d. times the client feels suicidal
YES
Is the client?
a. missing most of his/her childhood memories
b. engaged in espionage, professional sports, exotic dancing, psychic
activities,
Delta forces or any other profession that might link the victim to
mind-control
c. a member of the Catholic Church, Jehovah's Witnesses, Mormons or
Charismatic Movement
IF SOME OF THESE ARE YES
Suspect Total Mind-Control & Implement Actions for Mind Control
Page 348 ...
The issue of insomnia is a major issue in terms of deprogramming.
Therapists have typically neglected the impact that lack of sleep has
on the victim, as well as the positive impact a well-thought out
program to provide sleep & to create new improved sleep habits.
We
can’t tell you what will work for you, we can only tell you
what
has worked for others. A good sleep will help counter the effects of
mind-control, unfortunately good sleep is a rare commodity for victims
of trauma-based mind-control. It is very common for their support
person to have to hold them and comfort them night after night as the
programming breaks down & the horrible memories begin
surfacing.
Good sleep will also have a domino effect on improving other areas of
your life, such as personal relationships and productivity. Victims of
mind-control have a terrible time getting decent amounts of sleep. The
reasons for this are many, including heavy programming not to sleep
more than 3 hrs/night, body pains, chemical imbalances, anxiety, panic
attacks, & surfacing memories. For such a difficult problem,
the
most powerful over the counter medicine that some victims have
successfully used is a combination of ibuprofen and Chlorpheniramine
Maleate. Ipuprofen can be obtained in - 200 mg. caplets and
Chlorpheniramine Maleate can be obtained in 4 mg. tablets (or 8
mg.-time release tablets.) The combination of 400 mg. of Ibuprofen with
6 mg. of Chiorpheniramine Maleate taken together is the most powerful
(yet surprisingly gentle for the power it packs) medicine we know of.
Those who have used this found that after a period of time, like with
all drugs the effects begin to wane, and they would up the dosage
slightly. Perhaps what is most effective program over the long haul is
to have more than one method to get a good night sleep, and to intermix
the various methods so they all remain viable and healthy methods. The
liver produces lysozyme to protect itself against all foreign
chemicals. The increasing presence of lysozyme enzymes is how the body
increasingly destroys the effectiveness of any foreign chemical. The
high rates of lysozymes in the liver are very hard on it. After about 3
weeks, a person taking a chemical has pushed the liver to about the
maximum that is prudent. The person must then back-off from the
chemical intake in a slow withdrawal lest they trigger a reaction in
the body-mind. However, the extreme sleep problems that victims of
mind-control have, usually seem minor to the side-affects of drugs to
help them sleep. Medical science warns that a long-term use of any drug
for insomnia will eventually intensify the problem it initially cures.
This is why we advocate an attack against insomnia from several
different directions, and that the different solutions be intermixed at
different intervals. A prudent practice is to consult a reference book
such as Drug Handbook (pub. by Springhouse Corp.) in order to find out
the interactions, the nursing considerations, and the contraindications
of a particular drug. Pregnant women are especially limited in what
they can and can’t take. The therapist and the support
persons
should be aware that the victim may well be programmed not to accept
any meds, and it is counterproductive to scare the victim about the
dangers of drugs, because that will only play into the fears that are
already there. People react differently to meds and the goal is to
calmly and wisely find what works for the victim without increasing
their programmed resistance. In terms of herbs, Calms Forte (valerian,
aka garden heliotrope) can be helpful to relax a victim. Valerian even
comes
Page 349 ...
in tea-bags. Some of the over-the-counter newer sleep meds are gentle,
and have been effective for some victims. The advantages of taking
something that induces a mild gentle (not drugged) sleep state is that
it gives the victim a chance to recuperate and to begin to pull out of
what’s called the "alpha state" that their minds constantly
exist
in. An alcohol-induced sleep prevents REM sleep from occurring, and
some of the symptoms of hangovers are simply the direct result of REM
deprivation. (See below where REM sleep is discussed.) Bensodiazepines
such as Valium are sleep-inducing drugs that should be given under a
doctor’s supervision. They will only provide a short term
solution, but again as many victims of mind-control will agree, the
severity of the crisis is often such that such meds are welcome even if
they are only going to be temporary relief. Any short R-and-R is better
than no R-and-R in the battle for freedom. The body produces it own
chemicals to induce sleep. These are released by the body is relation
to how much physical work the body does. A good day of hard physical
work will certainly assist in the body chemically putting its own brain
to sleep. When the victim remains in their normal highly aroused state
of fear, with its high production of endorphins) it is hard for the
body to relax and sleep. Young or physically active victims of
mind-control can do aerobic exercises to counter the chemical arousals
in their bodies, to improve their bodies’ natural ability to
sleep. This is one of the safest long term approaches, if the
recovering victim has the physical makeup to safely exercise. The
victim should try and pick a comfortable position to sleep in, because
the less one moves around in sleep the less the brain is stimulated and
the better one sleeps. If no position is comfortable, pick the best
choice, and lay as quiet as possible. The fear of insomnia is as
dangerous as other fears in preventing sleep. Self-acceptance and
acceptance of life are positive ways to relax better and to get to
sleep. The support person can talk to the victim prior to the time they
retire and let the victim experience acceptance and love. This will
encourage the victim to let their mind dwell on unconditional
self-acceptance, which will encourage the mind to relax and sleep well.
A great deal of mischief can happen during sleep hours. Cult-loyal
alters will wait until the other alters have gone to sleep, and then
they will snatch the body and try to contact their master, or "go home"
to their master. As the trauma memories surface, hundreds of new
dissociated pieces of the mind float to the surface. If a young new
child alter finds itself in a strange environment, their instinct is to
run. If the support person is there to simply say, "its O.K.,
everything’s going to be O.K., relax...", then the support
person
may greatly prevent small alters from running out of the house as they
look for something safe, and actually getting the system into trouble.
A great deal of therapy can actually be done at night, and in relation
to the sleep state. This again is an area that is greatly missed by the
traditional hour at the therapist. In fact, experience has shown that
most DID clients who initially go into therapy will not open up and
explain to the therapist why they get poor sleep. The therapist needs
to be competent enough to draw out this information. Initially, before
deprogramming, the victim will most likely be able to get to sleep, but
will sleep only three hours, and will have reoccurring "nightmares" and
flashbacks. Once the victim begins deprogramming and working on issues,
they will often like to sleep in because they sleep best in the early
morning hours. Again, we have seen this to be common among recovering
victims of mind-control all over the U.S. Many alter systems have a few
alters who specialize in sleeping well. For instance,
Page 350 ...
Presidential models as they fly to foreign countries to deliver
messages may have an alter who is proficient at sleeping during the
flight. During time periods when good sleep is needed, the system may
be in a position to pull up alters that sleep well and let them hold
the body, so that the body gets rested. During periods of intense
deprogramming it is good for the system to get good sleep. Poor sleep
weakens the victim physically and mentally. Poor sleep inhibits the
problem-solving abilities of the mind, which is the very thing that
victims need to resist the handlers. It will also over a period of time
deteriorate the victim’s health, (but understand the people
who
use slaves could care less about their health, they often use people
like they would a straw from a fast food restaurant. The handlers also
know that a healthy slave means a higher risk that the slave will
rebel.) Normally, a sleeping person goes through 5 sleep patterns
(called stages) in sequence and then the sleeping patterns repeat
themselves (although stage 4 may drop out after the first cycle, and
the person goes through the progressively deeper stages of sleep
1-2-3-5.)
These stages are
STAGE 1: about 5 minutes
STAGE 2: the first stage of deep relaxation, lasts about 45-50 minutes.
STAGE 3: a short stage where the brain waves slow down
STAGE 4: the stage where the brain produces delta waves, sleep walking
and nightmares occur in this stage.
STAGE 5: REM (rapid-eye-movement) sleep, most normal dreams occur
during this time, which in a normal sleep pattern would last 15-30
minutes, the body doesn’t move, but there may be sexual
arousal
during this period of sleep, the muscles in the ear act as if they are
listening intently. The REM dreams are mainly a right-brain product.
The mind protects the body from acting out the dreams, by shutting down
the body. Knowing this will help the victim realize that when they are
thrashing about in a memory in bed, they are not in a REM sleep dream.
This process will then recycle once or twice again as the night
proceeds. Interestingly, the mind develops sleep habits, just as it
develops habits for other habitual tasks. If a person develops poor
sleep habits as a fretful child sleeper they tend to carry these habits
with them into adulthood. This means that victims of mind-control are
having to break long-term habits. Readers can refer to what Fritz wrote
on ‘‘cognitive demon
processes’’ in Chapter 4
in order to understand how the mind develops relationships in its
"cognitive demon processes in order to relegate repeated tasks to
unconscious mental processes (habits). The therapist may also have to
do some work around fear of sleep. Victims of trauma-based mind control
are very fearful to lose control of their minds by going to sleep, and
they have a fear of nightmares and other horrible things, such as
ghosts appearing etc., that all add up to create a terrible fear of
sleep. The victim wants to remain vigilant to protect themselves
against whatever might happen at night. This is why an alert support
person is needed in the vicinity to help calm the victim, so they can
relax at night from their fear that something terrible is going to
happen. This also means the support person must be vigilant during the
night to help protect the victim. If the victim can begin to break down
the irrational automatic thought processes that have been programmed
into the mind, by using and strengthening the rational logical parts of
the mind, they can begin to regain control over their own lives.
Automatic thoughts that have been programmed into the non-rational part
of the mind will attempt to control the mind. Gradually, the hierarchy
of irrational thought processes will be challenged and their power
taken away. This will give the
Page 351 ...
mind a chance to regain its natural composure, and will help the victim
regain their own mind so that they can relax and begin to have healthy
sleep habits. The use of journals, where the rational parts of the mind
can be brought to bear on the irrational thought processes, can be a
help in regaining self-control. This will also help the victim regain
the ability to have proper sleep. Some victims have had success in
reducing their mental stress by journaling for 30 minutes prior to
attempting to sleep. Worrying doesn’t resolve itself if left
to
rattle around in the brain unattached to anything solid, but once our
worries are put onto paper, they have been dragged through the rational
part of the brain and can be organized and challenged. When disturbing
thoughts surface, the outline that can be used for journaling is this:
• What are the WHO, WHAT, WHERE & WHY, & HOW?
• What THOUGHTS COME AUTOMATICALLY?
• What are RATIONAL THOUGHTS ASSOCIATED with these thoughts?
• What are the FEELINGS ASSOCIATED with these thoughts?
• What are the THOUGHT ERRORS or DISTORTIONS IN THIS THINKING?
WHERE did these thoughts come from?
One little known fact, is that the fear of not being able to sleep can
create such a strong fear pattern that a five-second arousal during the
night, that would normally not threaten a person’s sleep,
causes
the fearful person to wake up and stay awake. If you do wake up and are
fearful of not sleeping (or fearful of going to sleep)--the best advice
is to leave your room, do some other quiet activity until you feel
sleepy again and then go back to sleep. Don’t lay in bed and
allow your mind to fuss and to internally fume. This will create a
negative association in the mind between the bed and fussing and fuming
in fear of sleeplessness, and will only aggravate the long term
situation. Dealing with spiritual problems, not just surface issues but
deep issues will also help a person’s sleep. Learning to let
go
of issues is also beneficial.
L-Tryptophan is an amino acid that aids the brain in the manufacture of
serotonin, and serotonin is used by the brain to reduce the
brain’s feeling of stress. Bedtime fats and milk actually
reduce
the amount of L-Tryptophan in the brain. Food does cause blood to go to
the abdomen, and reduces blood in the brain. Vitamin E causes
restlessness in some people if eaten within short periods before sleep.
Saltine crackers have been found to be the overall best snack to
encourage L-Tryptophan levels. Each individual is a complex array of
processes. It may be that a nice snack calms a person down, even though
it subtracts from the L-Tryptophan level. In review, we have suggested
a multi-pronged assault on insomnia. This assault can take the form of:
direct temporary drug intervention by over the counter or prescribed
meds, specific tasks that a support person can perform before &
during the sleep period to help the victim deal with a variety of
issues, specific tasks that the victim can perform spiritually, in
terms of diet, in terms of attitudes, in terms of dealing with internal
fears, in terms of which alters sleep and which stand guard, in how to
journal so that issues are resolved for the mind to rationally relax,
and a number of other positive suggestions. If these suggestions are
followed in a concerted fashion, they will reduce the problems with
insomnia, and help the victim destroy one more aspect of the
mind-control.
Page 352
p_demons.jpg
This artwork by author Cisco Wheeler from the 1980's portrays images
that came when we began to get parts of a memory protected by demons.
In the centre of the picture is a tree upon which the child is
connected. The tree is a standard programming image upon which programs
are attached. The tree itself has strong roots, and feels like death.
The mind wants to go further but the demonic comes to the foreground
and blocks the memory.
p_demons2.jpg
This author's artwork shows how boxed in a victim feels. Observe that
the house and the environment is trapped in a girl which feels like a
fence boxing the trauma-based mind-control in. The house is breaking
up. Things are drawn shattered and in fear. The light would like to
come out but it is blocked by spiritual darkness. The home is
shattered, and is off any foundation, just like most typical abusive
family situationsare where such mind-control takes place
Page 353 ...
Multiplicity, understanding
When an entire alter system is looked at, it appears very much like a
city of people. A city of people will divide itself into different
tasks. If a city lacks a plumber, someone will fill that nitch. If a
city lacks a judge, someone will fill that nitch. Joe may know
everything about Charlie, but Charlie may know little or nothing about
Joe. Sue and Sally may converse and share their lives with each other.
Some people in a city will know each other well, know of someone else,
but by and large most people will be strangers. An altar system is
structured. In many countries, such as Russia, a city is also very
structured. The people do not change jobs very frequently. A therapist
may observe a particular job and behavior pattern of an alter and forty
years later observe the same behavior. Alter systems have families of
alters and generations of alters, just like a city of people would have
families and several generations. In fact, as most readers already
realize, a structured multiple will have teachers, libraries, castles,
rivers, houses, jails, airports (runways) and many other things in
their internal worlds that correspond to what a city would also have.
If an alter itself could be examined under these two authors’
"psychological-processes microscope", it would be possible to see how
an individual alter before therapy is a complex set of mental processes
that responds to life- as it was designed. After therapy, the alter
begins to reflect some mental processes that the person’s
brain
has chosen to incorporate on its own. If the brain is thought of as a
machine, it is a machine that has billions of pieces and is incredibly
intricate in its capabilities and design. The brain makes complex
machines look very simple in comparison. If survival of the mind means
compartmentalizing trauma memories so that these memories
don’t
interfere with everyday life, the mind is quite capable of the task. It
is quite capable of attaching memories and trained behavior patterns
and habits to those dissociated parts of the mind. The programmers work
with the mind. They program alters according to their natural bent
during the trauma process. In order to function, the brain
automatically develops several items. First, the brain develops K-lines
of processes (which are called habits). The brain also develops a
self-image(s). When the mind is fractured, each piece can be given its
own self-image and its own habits. But it is important not to lose
track of the larger picture. Just like a person in a city is not an
island unto himself, an alter is part of a system. A person in a city
may find himself called for jury duty, drafted, taxed, monitored, spied
upon, and other things. Likewise, an alter will have to function within
the larger context of the alter system and its programming. Even the
front alters will be tainted in how they perform in their daily lives
by the side effects of multiplicity and their own programming. A
multiple will not know anything but the world that they have been
programmed to see and the role they have been programmed to function
in. But therapy will begin to break down the programming. Yes, alters
can learn and can change. The mind can change the programmed "habits"
of action and thoughts of an alter, just like it can change the habits
of any person. The difficulty lies in the fact that habits take time to
change unless hypnosis is used to by-pass the mind’s natural
build-in mechanisms of stability. An alter can learn a new behavior.
The therapist should know the history of an alter so that he or she
knows the platform and scripts that the alter works under. Then the
therapist can change the way
Page 354 ...
that alter works within their role. For instance, a sexual alter can be
given a new way of looking at sexual boundaries so that the alter
changes its behavior within that sexual role. In other words, modify a
habit of thought or action, rather than rebuilding from scratch. "You
can take the boy out of the farm, but you can’t take the farm
out
of the boy", is a common expression about how hard it is to completely
remake the thinking of a person. It will be difficult to remake the
thinking of an alter. The foundation (the platform) upon which they
were created will continue to serve as the framework of that alter.
Either that framework is painstakingly collapsed by joining
(integrating) that part with another part that it was associated with,
or the framework is built upon to change the ways that alters acts and
thinks. To make an analogy, it is harder to get a man or woman to quit
thinking like a man or woman, than to recognize a behavior and modify
their behavior in more productive direction. This is what successful
marriage counselors are doing, for instance in the book Men are from
Mars, Women are from Venus. Perhaps someday someone will write a book
Gatekeepers are from Uranus, and Mothers of Darkness are from Saturn.
Rainbows are important, for many alters only live over the rainbow in a
world of make believe. These alters were created with a foundation of
imagination and psychosis. In this case, these alters need deep
therapy. They live in trance, and it is silly for Christians to think
that these alters should not have hypnotic help, when their thinking is
always hypnotic thinking. Some alters because they are a special
purpose alter come out and take the body with "exaggerated"
behavior--they are very shy, or very aggressive, etc. It makes only
good sense that if a particular alter is dangerous, the people who live
around the multiple should identify how that dangerous alter is
triggered and then refrain from triggering it.
Page 355 ...
Panic attacks, suggestions
Panic is when one loses control of one’s fear. The brain must
struggle to regain control, so that reason prevails rather than an
out-of-control response. During a panic attack, the mind-body-and soul
are all living in the panic attack. The therapist might experience the
client having a panic attack by a series of numerous repeated calls.
The victim might experience a panic attack as the need to cut
themselves to feel pain to prove to themselves that they are real. For
recovering victims of trauma-based mind-control, panic attacks bubble
up into the conscious mind on their own. They may even surface during
the dream state. So what do you do? If the panic surfaces, remind
yourself that it has always been there, nothing has changed, its just
surfaced into the conscious mind. Relax, its always been there, waiting
to be triggered or pulled to the surface. Nothing has changed but a
person’s awareness of the panic. Next, remind yourself that
panic
represents knowledge and that knowledge represents understanding. Panic
represents an awareness, whether physical or mental, that something has
taken place. If we want to understand that awareness, we
can’t
stand in it. We must encompass that panic. We must take our control
back. We don’t run from it, we address it. If we address the
situation, we stand a better chance not to reshatter. How can we
address the situation? If it is a memory, put it up on a screen. (Go to
the section on avoidance of abreactions.) If the panic concerns a real
life situation, the mind must be prepared that anytime an emergency
triggers panic, that the rational mind must be given back its
driver’s seat. The mind should be trained to give the
rational
part of the mind control, if panic begins. This is the training of the
mind. Perhaps a logical alter can be found to hold the body during such
times, while others work with that logical alter to help keep things
calm. If one knows that one will be approaching a situation in life
that will panic certain alters, place them in protective sheltered
rooms, or put them to sleep. In fact, fear of an upcoming situation can
be a trigger for a panic attack. Support persons need to realize that
panic attacks which begin with one alter can spread through a system.
An activity that a front alter thinks is going to be fun, may trigger
panic in little child alters. The panic will be so overwhelming as it
leaks back into the awareness of the front alter, that it distracts
from the fun of the activity. Panic is not always programming going
off. Panic attacks commonly occur when the victim finds out that they
are a multiple, and when they have to face "You mean someone abused
me?", "You mean someone carried out mind-control on me?" Another aspect
of panic, is that the alter which is panicked may likely switch. One of
the common tricks of deeper alters and internal programmers, is to
panic an alter with coded memories that surface upon a code being
thought internally. This is an easy way to move alters that are holding
the body out of the way, when deeper cult alters want out.
On the flip side, a good Illuminati programmer never allows the slave
to have uncontrolled panic. He will allow controlled panic. The
programmer will watch for splits from panic, because the survival fear
that goes with such splits will make a good warrior alters for
ceremonies.
Page 356 ...
Understanding programming
START WITH THE CORRECT ATTITUDES
It almost goes without saying that the commitment by the members of the
support team (therapist, guard, deliverance minister, friend, etc.) has
to be that the victim is the center of concern, and the center of
importance. We of the support team must endeavor to make the cure less
painful to the victim than the problem. A Christ-like commitment to lay
down one’s own life for another person needs to be felt. This
does not mean that the support team must destroy themselves to save the
victim, on the contrary, by being Christ-like and employing their
skills the members of the support team can find great joy, satisfaction
and purpose in life. Programming has gone on for centuries, and
it’s only been in the last few years that significant
progress
has been made to deprogram, so let’s not lose hope just
because
the evil side continues to progress.
REMAIN FLEXIBLE
In dealing with mind control as a support team member it is important
that you understand there is a variety of mind-control techniques, for
instance DID, implants, and skull manipulation. Because there is such a
wide-variety to mind-control and programming, nothing is routine in
delivering a person from mind-control. For many years, due to the heavy
infiltration within the fields of psychiatry and psychology much of the
information put out in this area has been disinformation. The support
team needs to erase any myths they have picked up from the mainstream
of these professions, and focus on what they discover from the client.
Hopefully, some of the guidelines and criteria provided in our 3 books
on mind-control, especially this section, will be helpful to obtain the
correct diagnosis. When a therapist has used only one approach and
reports consistently getting 100% success-rates, that may be a tip-off
that this therapist (or minister) is exaggerating his/her success rate.
Until you can watch a victim 24 hours a day, 365 days out of a year for
several years, and you can confidently say the person has fully
integrated and has no alters working on the astral plane, nor any
alters involved in any other way with the controllers, then there is no
sure way to pronounce a victim fully recovered from the mind-control.
And even then, if the victim has implants, it may simply mean that the
implants are temporarily not being used. When the reader has studied
this book and the Vol. 2, he will have discovered that some mind
control is done via a variety of techniques such as: ELF waves, some by
implants, some by genetics, some through peer pressure, some by skull
manipulation as well as other techniques. Common sense will tell you
that one method can not provide the solution to such varied techniques.
This is why this book’s co-authors are stressing the need to
assemble teams of people to work with victims. Some victims of
mind-control during initial therapeutic screening have had their
memories, mind control, & programming rejected as being false
because it didn’t fit with what the therapist had already
encountered. The victim endures a great deal of pain to have their
lives and programming probed, so it is beneficial if the therapist is
aware of some of the various types of mind-control and their
combinations that the therapist may encounter. As the therapist picks
up tell-tale signs of one particular type of programming or another, it
will make it easier to understand what the overall situation might be.
There are similarities between the programming of the 1940’s
and
’50’s and even
Page 357 ...
into the ’60’s, but as time progressed the
programming
sophistication has grown by leaps and bounds. One change over the years
has been the level of specialization which the programmers have
developed. When a particular type of personality is identified within a
child, the programming has become very specialized and sophisticated to
work within the natural makeup of that mind-set. The last few decades
has also seen the introduction and perfection of sophisticated
mind-control technologies that allow the trauma-based mind-control to
be fine-tuned and then hidden behind more obvious technologies such as
implants. There seems to be a trend, at least for some types of
professions, that less splitting of the mind is carried out today than
was done in the ‘50’s and more fine-tuning and
high-tech
used. This appears to be done because it results in more stable
individuals, which due to the improved superior abilities of the more
modern programmers, are still just as reliably responsive to orders.
The goals are to produce slaves that produce better results with less
maintenance and supervision by the handler. Computers are believed to
be the key to modernization. Still there are principles that define how
the mind works and hopefully therapists that understand those
principles can continue to discover ways to help the more recent
victims.
TAKE NOTE OF WHAT TYPE OF VICTIM YOU HAVE
At the lower end of the victim-caste-system are victims who are brought
into this nation from South or Central America and who are programmed
to be expendable slaves. They are only treated as slaves, and never
experience a good life. Beautiful white women taken to Saudi Arabia at
times fall into this category, where they are kept hidden in slave
conditions and are as expendable as a piece of furniture. The victim
may not even know who they are, they may be "Dorothy" all the way down
the line. The next level are victims who are not members of the
Illuminati, who are allowed to function in everyday life as common
people. They suffer greatly, but often have what appears to be a common
life, albeit somewhat strange to those close enough to them to notice
the strangeness to their lives. These are people used as guinea pigs,
as spies, as assassins, and sexual slaves. Often their abusers are
branches of the government. The top level slaves are going to have
their pride attached to the Illuminati. They will be allowed to share
some power, they will have an elaborate belief system that makes them
feel superior to those on the outside of their elite special group.
They will be given peers and "twins" who are programmed like themselves
to make them feel like they belong to this wonderful group which has
some wonderful charismatic leader. The group will validate their
identity that comes from being a member of this elite group. The
leadership may wine and dine this slave. The leadership will share some
power (actually delegate, they hold the final strings) with the victim.
For instance, the victim may have a magic wand and a staff. The victim
will be allowed to merge with the great leader through sexual rituals.
The group dynamics will alleviate the guilt that an individual might
develop on their own. This is the description of someone who has been
part of the Illuminati hierarchy. You can expect your Illuminati
victims to have pride in their elite status. You can expect them to
tell you about banquets, and limousines, and masked balls. Their abuse
will be covered over by manipulative love, status, and pride. The
Illuminati are skilled in knowing how to cover abuse with love. The
loving parent that is reported by a child to be "able to do no wrong",
may well be the child’s primary abuser in the worst way. The
foundation for all the "good benefits" for a hierarchy slave is PURE
DECEPTION. The charismatic leader will
Page 358 ...
only be a image, a fantasy. If the victims will stop to remember the
details, they were coerced on threat of the penalty of death to join
the group of people they belong to, they are not allowed to really have
real relationships to their sisters or brothers in the cult, and the
cult’s supposed new light and deep teachings are simply a
collection of ancient babblings of lost and confused people that have
been repackaged as powerful new revelations. In review, it might be
said that the expendable non-hierarchy mind-controlled slave is held in
place without the trappings of grandeur that are given to the hierarchy
victims. The Illuminati lay great stress on the victim’s
joining
of their own free will. Sometimes that does occur, but often the victim
has been so stripped that they no longer exercise free will. You as a
member of the support team can point out that the victim’s
support for their abusers has been constructed on a foundation of
deceit by the abusers. Rather than denying that the slave was wined and
dined, show how everything was done for purposes of manipulation. Every
gift came with a price tag.
HOW THE MIND CREATES A PROGRAMMED REALITY
The idea of consciousness vs. subconscious are difficult to describe
but are fundamental to how the programming works. What mental activity
is occurring in the mind of an individual? Most mental activity is
unconscious. Many of our activities in life are done unconsciously. If
our attention is directed somewhere else, we can perform an activity
without a conscious awareness. Some mental activity surfaces from the
subconscious. Day dreaming has been recognized as beneficial in a
person’s well being. Delinquent teenage boys have been found
to
seldom daydream. The mental activity of thoughts, emotions, perceptions
and memories are all embedded into the mind. The structures of the mind
are built by thoughts and emotions. A chaotic jumble of impressions is
organized by the mind into something cohesive and useable. Our minds
fabricate a reality from our thoughts and emotions. The programmer
steps into the picture and makes that reality designing a team
activity. Emotions, hallucinations, moods, phobias, sensory
perceptions, trances and visions are not part of cognitive conscious
data-based knowledge, but are more like the ROM memory that runs a
computer which is permanent and untouchable. These are important
foundational structures of thinking. They lay in the subconscious. The
subconscious mind is like a cess pool. The subconscious mind accepts
whatever has been allowed by the mind to reach it. Once something is
accepted in, the subconscious mind doesn’t evaluate it. That
is
why hypnosis and illusion are so powerful. Using hypnosis, the
programmer can place an idea into the subconscious that would take long
periods of time for the mind to naturally screen and then accept into
the subconscious. Briefly described, thoughts and emotions create the
mind’s reality. The programmer wants to be able to tamper
with
how the mind’s reality is created. The front alters, who hold
the
body day-to-day, will have to face the shortcomings of whoever is their
system’s programmer, cult leaders, or handler. For some
slaves,
say for instance, Anton LaVey’s or Michael
Aquino’s, their
programmer is their cult leader and their handler-- all three wrapped
up in one individual. The victim’s front alters will
experience
the shortcomings of their controller. Rather, than fight against what
the mind will see and hear, the programmer will reframe it. They want
the front alters to see the human aspect. They want them to see the
"faults", but accept the weaknesses as a normal function of the
humanness of the person. The faults are refrained as merely human
frailty
Page 359 ...
and negative external circumstances. Let’s give an example:
The victim is encouraged to think: Yes, he drank, but so what? He was a
social person and of course he had to drink.... Yes, he made a mistake,
but it was someone else’s fault. The negatives of the
programmer
are refrained as natural positives by the programmer. The
victim’s mind will feel very comfortable with these
rationales.
This is an example of how the programmer has tampered with the
mind’s perception of reality. This tampering is part of the
subtle hypnotic programming. Do the programmers do this type of subtle
programming? Yes, it is a standard thing to place this refraining in to
protect the father "Daddy" and Mother Programmer images. As Illuminati
programmers, we were taught to use thoughts, emotions, comfort and
discomfort to mold the mind’s reality. (The mind decides if
it is
in a state of comfort or discomfort. At some extreme point, the mind
can do a reversal and decide that pain is pleasure. In such a reversal,
the mind will move in the direction of comfort, i.e. pain. In our
example, we are not describing such an extreme situation. It is quite
normal for the mind to whitewash its image of an authority figure; this
is an in-born natural comfort zone.) Now let’s say that a
therapist wants to tamper with that programming. The therapist can
attack the programming head on by saying, "Your programmer was an evil
man." But this approach plays into the hands of the programmer, whose
manufactured reality will resist such a head on approach. The therapist
may want to use the back door approach to side step the resistance. The
backdoor method prevents triggers. A backdoor approach might be:
THERAPIST: "What would you have liked to have seen in the life of
[controller’s name]?
SLAVE: "I wish he would not have drank so much?"
THERAPIST: "How did that affect you?"
SLAVE: "I didn’t get taken care of."
The backdoor approach frees the victim from having to make a judgment
call that the controller was right or wrong, good or evil. It makes the
issue into an "I issue", "I would have liked..." The victim
doesn’t have to step out too far from the mind’s
comfort
zone.
THE VICTIM’S POWER ENDS WHERE FEAR BEGINS
At the point the victim begins to fear is where the victim gives the
programmer power. This is a basic principle well known by Illuminati
programmers. The programming is built upon this. Some children actually
intuitively grasp methods to not fear the programmer. If the child does
this, the child becomes harder to program, because A Person’s
POWER Ends Where FEAR Begins. At the point of powerlessness and fear,
the world around the victim becomes more like a dream. Eventually, fear
becomes a comfort zone for the victim. A visual representation of
powerlessness is the teddy bear, who has no genitals, no hands, or
feet. (The Teddy Bear finds its way into our Illustrated Guidebook.
Some therapists have found the visual images of the Illustrated
Guidebook helpful.) In the previous example, the victim at first will
feel strange and uneasy to question their life. They are moving out of
their comfort zone of simple existence into the life of choices. Many
alters need help as they take their first wobbly steps toward freedom
of thought and action. When FEAR enters the mind, perceptions of
reality are altered. Fears can be conditioned into the mind. The
programmers know how to introduce fears. FEAR taps into the death
circuits of the brain and activates "death related reflexes". The
programmer is like the conductor of a symphony of fears, at one point
orchestrating one area, at another
Page 360 ...
point bringing another fear to a crescendo. The programmers know how
the mind protects itself. The free will of the brain is orchestrated
out of existence to the "tune of dependence upon the programmer". The
natural flow of how the mind perceives reality is drowned out under the
influence of fear. The programmer can interrupt natural perceptions of
reality by introducing fear. The fear creates fragments in the mind,
and denials in the mind. In the end, the victim of programming has
pieces of reality that appear out of nowhere and seem unconnected and
like a dream. Is fear bad? When a person is stripped of trust in God
and man, where do they turn? Fear seems comfortable to the victim, who
cannot say "nothing ventured, nothing gained, I’ll walk right
through this situation." The instinct of the brain is to run toward its
image of comfort, fear. How does the victim rise above the fear? There
are ways, but they generally involve the victim getting outside help.
The therapist will want to stay one step ahead of FEAR. Different
people will have different kinds of fear. Males are born wanting to be
protective and strong. They are designed to face the outside world and
lovingly protect. The programmers break their male identity. They are
stripped of it when they see that they are powerless to protect other
children and powerless to protect themselves. They further feel
unprotected by their mothers when they are tortured as infants. This
brings in a strong sense of rejection. They know they are weak and
helpless. Their in-born desire to want to lovingly protect is
destroyed, because they develop the subconscious attitude that love
can’t protect. Because LOVE CAN’T PROTECT, these
men become
hardened. At the root of their hardness, is the fear that they
can’t love (accepted by the subconscious through their
inability
to lovingly protect) nor are they worthy of love (built in by their
feeling rejected of their mom’s loving protection). Once the
subconscious attitude is accepted that they can’t love nor be
loved, they die emotionally. They run from emotions because of a
subconscious awareness of the trauma. When men run from their emotions,
they find it natural to tap into their intellect. In summary, the male
is born to have strength to protect what it loves. When traumatized,
the male feels helpless, and develops a fear of love and emotion. Love
becomes a negative to subconsciously run from. The programmer only
needs to tap into the mind’s own methods to protect itself.
The
mind will protect the programming much better than the programmer ever
could. After FEAR is well established as a foundation, the programming
team will layer in with repetition the NO TALK, NO SEE, NO HEAR
messages over and over. They will repeat "DO NOTHING TO HURT THE FAMILY
[family means the Illuminati, or at times another cult]." If left to
its own devices, the mind has the ability to sort things out, and right
itself. The programmers are fully aware of how the mind might right
itself, and pull itself out of the programmer’s lies. The
Illuminati teach their programmers "not to let the conscious become
conscious, not to let the intellect become intellect, and not to let
love become love." What this means is that what consciously happens in
external reality, is not permitted to be internalized as conscious
reality. The programming tricks to prevent this could fill a book, and
many are mentioned in our Vol. 2 Formula book. Love becomes love when
the self knows the true self. Therefore, the task of the programmer
becomes to HIDE THE TRUE SELF FROM THE MIND. Some of the greatest
philosophers have said that the greatest goal of life is to KNOW
THYSELF. The goal of the programmer is to make sure of just the
opposite, that the victim does not know themselves. They are trained in
Page 361 ...
techniques to do this.
If we understand that the programmer is trained to program the mind TO
FORGET ITSELF, then of course it is clear that the therapist needs to
help the victim to REMEMBER who they are.
GIVING THE VICTIM HIS OR HER IDENTITY BACK
Countless therapists and ministers have trapped mind-control victims
within their programming by advising them to let bygones be bygones,
let the past and the skeletons of the past be buried, forgive and
forget, etc. etc. This traps most of the victim’s mind in
their
programming. Of course this feels safe for the front alters. After all,
who wants to discover the horrors underneath them, that their mind has
forgotten? It would be helpful if ministers would remember that God
encourages self-examination in numerous scriptures. "Whoso loveth
instruction loveth knowledge, but he that hateth reproof is brutish."
PROV 12:1. "The spirit of man is the candle of the Lord searching out
the innermost parts of his being." PROV 20:27 "If we would judge
ourselves we should not be judged." (1 COR 11:3 1)
In other words, if we want to be more than animals, we need to examine
ourselves and love to learn. It is God’s candle for a man to
examine his own innermost parts. And when we find problems with
ourselves, we are to deal with them, and then God won’t have
to.
The therapist needs to reverse what the cult has done. Give the victim
his or her identity back. Equip his or her consciousness with what a
person’s mind would normally be conscious of. Give the person
back the intelligence that belongs to their entire mind. Equip the
person with a love for God’s plan for their life and an
appreciation for God’s design of things. Give the person
their
life back by letting them know themselves, and if possible, by letting
them join into the whole person they were intended to be by the real
God in heaven. Interestingly, the programming is not able to snuff out
the person’s original personality entirely. The programmers
prefer to work within the natural abilities of a mind. This is just
good common sense. Horse trainers do the same. The trainer uses a
standard bred horse which has been bred to pull carriages to pull carts
& buggies, a draft horse to pull farm equipment, & a
pinto to
ride. If the victim has abilities, he can rightly take ownership of
those abilities. It is much more likely that the programmers have
suppressed many of the victims abilities in order to control them.
Rather than creating the slave’s abilities, the programmers
have
simply exploited their natural abilities.
TYPICALLY A VICTIM HAS PROGRAMS:
· to tamper with the senses: to confuse or stop the senses,
make
the senses feel like they are in some drugged state, to destroy
one’s sense of balance, cause pain, a sense of hot or cold.
· to tamper with the spirituality of the victim, to relieve
their guilt, to destroy their humanness, to get them to subscribe to
occult or atheistic philosophies, to hate God, to lock demons into
place,
· that are codes using alpha-numeric words, colors, music,
rhymes and sounds.
· that tamper with memory, cover programs, false histories,
hypnotic surgeries,
· that control with the emotions, so that they can be
triggered to be happy, sad, angry, tired, guilty or afraid.
· that control actions, such as anorexic no-eat programs,
no-talk programs, assassination programs, mute programs, no-cry
programs, return-to-cult programs, sexual programs, specific assignment
programs, suicide & self-mutilation programs, trigger other
slave
programs.
· that control the mind, such as memory flooding, phobias,
go insane program, be confused etc.
· that control the body: such as heart rate programs, body
temperature programs, to prevent helpful medicine from working programs.
For a good list of the different programs see the Universal Function
Codes on page 80 of our Vol. 2 Formula book.
Page 362 ...
These programs can be triggered several ways, from both internal and
external triggers. By learning that an emotion, thought, or action is a
program, the victim gains conscious control over what is happening. The
cue may still cause the subconscious desire to fulfill the program, but
the victim is beginning to take back his/her life. It becomes harder
and harder for the programs to work, when the conscious mind is aware
of what they are, and the conscious mind does not want to submit.
Memory work on how the program was laid in, and desensitization work
will also assist the victim to regain some power.
Charting (notetaking) about everything that can be observed about the
victim, will assist the support team in the long run. This is nothing
more than what was done while they were being programmed. The doctors
and programmers during programming expect every little detail to be
charted. Charting will also assist with mapping, which is discussed
later. Charting will assist the therapeutic team to build - a frame
work to the puzzle they are working on. Don’t expect the
victim
to be able to explain their programming. The mind-control programming
team has traumatized a child victim enough that by the age of 3 1/2
they will cease asking "why?" Instead they are taught that everything
outside of fantasy is bad, the outside world is bad, they are only to
do what they are allowed by the programming team to do. From then on,
most of the victim’s alters (if not all) will lack the
freedom to
ask and discover the complexity of what has happened to them. As the
reader has seen, programming is designed to manipulate the actions, the
body, the emotions, the memory, the mind, the programming, the senses,
and the spirituality of the victim. This is why we have decided to call
it "total" mind-control. This type of trauma-based total mind-control
will cause shattering and much damage to the soul (mind, will and
emotions). The therapist will have to deal with lots of distortions and
fragmentation in this area. It will cause lots of medical damage to the
body, for instance weak bowel and bladder control. The medical damage
can only be addressed by trained medical persons who are sensitive to
the needs of a victim of mind-control. Considerable damage is done to
the spiritual life of the victim, and the victim will have to take a
bath in the redeeming blood of Christ’s atoning blood. Many
of
the words and symbols of Christianity will be difficult for the victim
to hear. For instance, the words sealing, blood, and Jesus may have
totally different meanings and emotional content to the victim than to
non-victims. This can be worked around by experimenting with workable
terminology. They will have to relearn who the real God in heaven is,
rather than the cult’s imitation god that the cult talked
about,
as well as their misrepresentations. Finally, the support team will
have to deal with whatever structured and programmed DID is present in
the victim. Is it easier to see why we are advocating support teams
rather than a lone individual to help the victim? If the spiritual part
of the programming, which is the most secret part, which we referred to
as Gamma programming in our Illust rated Guidebook, is not addressed,
then complex MPD systems will not make much headway against the
programming. Many complex MPD systems have worked hard for years and
then give up hope due to the slow progress and the lack of any end in
sight.
Page 363 ...
Other complex systems have seen dramatic results when deliverance
methods freed the deeper sections from demonic bondage. The new freedom
allowed them to progress on the other issues that they had gotten
bogged down in and made no progress on prior to the deliverance.
Obviously, not all programming is the same, it is determined by what
group is programming, who their programmer is, what the dissociative
abilities of the victim are, and what talents the programmers are
wanting to create or exploit. Sometimes a programming cult does not get
all the time they desire to carry out the programming. In this case,
the programming will be limited. However, in most cases the programmers
have as much access to a victim as they want, especially if both
parents are in the cult. In cases where the victim does not hypnotize
& dissociate easily, their systems will be far less complex. It
has
been correctly determined by various researchers that a
person’s
ability to be hypnotized is a gauge to determine how much a person will
dissociate. However, front alters will be heavily programmed not to
allow themselves to be hypnotized, so the gauge will not always work
for determining how much splitting the programmers have done. The two
abilities, dissociability and hypnotizability, are simply different
aspects of the same thing. It does hold true that if the victim is
predisposed to dissociate, that the programmers can build more complex
structures. If a skilled therapist can get some handle on how
dissociative his client is, he can- get an early guesstimate on how
much splitting and structuring the Illuminati or Illuminati front group
may have done to the mind-controlled slave.
Protection, spiritual
Page 364 ...
Before one can see the value of spiritual armor and those things that
would protect a person spiritually, one has to be able to understand
what is being protected. This book has dealt with how Satan builds his
structures within his mind-controlled servants, but what does God build
within His people? Satan is a corruptor and an imitator. Knowing that
will give the reader a clue that what Satan has designed is a
corruption and in part an imitation of the structures God builds. The
spiritual armor that God directs godly people to employ are designed to
protect the structures that God creates paradise out of.
At this point it would be worthwhile to display the basic structure
that God builds within both a person and His Body of Saints, in
comparison to the basic structure that Satan builds within a person, as
well as society. These structures are basic patterns that reproduce
themselves at different levels, the macrocosm and the microcosm of the
spiritual world. The programmed multiple will have a justice system
(judge alters), it will have values (satanic and occult knowledge and
wisdom), it will have possessions (such as its birthright, their
illusion of health, their titles, etc.), and it will have its false
truths (the programming). The leadership of a system will provide a
miniature state with a hierarchal structure run by Lucifer and his
internal Grand Druid Council. - Within God’s children, He
builds
Truth and Life. God’s true ministers are life-givers. That is
why
Christ said he came to save people, not to judge people. By building
consistency in a person’s life, God is fashioning that person
not
to be double-minded, not to be a hypocrite, not to be wishy-washy, not
to be undependable, but to be more like Himself. God is unchanging. He
is the same yesterday, today and tomorrow, and therefore he treats all
people equal, it rains on the just and the unjust; or in other words
God is EQUITABLE. He doesn’t really play favorites, but
because
He is God, He doesn’t explain what seems like arbitrary
decisions
to us. God will build order, justice, life, truth and equity into His
servants. These elements (diagrammed out for the reader on the next
page) make up the elements of Paradise and the attributes of God as
described in the Word of God. These are the elements, the spiritual
structures, that the armor of God described in Ephesians 6 are designed
to protect.
Some people think that spiritual protection comes from prayer. But if
we look at the word of God--and also learn from great spiritual
warriors, we discover that the spiritual armor that God
describes--TRUTH, FAITH, SALVATION etc. are great tools to protect us.
For instance the truth does set a Monarch victim free. But it
isn’t enough to have "the Truth", the Word of God says only
the
love of the truth will protect us. (see THES.) For a mind-control
victim to know that they have salvation, gives them great leverage to
defeat the attacks of the enemy. If a victim has a alter or alters who
can have total faith in God, and can move forward in that faith, that
faith will literally become a force-field around them that will move
the enemy out of the way, and cause them to back off or surrender.
Prayer is not the answer in itself--but prayer built upon the
structures that God builds in a person, prayer built on love, prayer
built on faith, and hope and life and truth--these prayers will have
power. From the great reluctance of many church going people to learn
the type of truthful information that our books are revealing, in spite
of the horrible truth that these issues affect their lives in big ways,
shows that many people do not realize the spiritual protection that
truth gives its holder. We are born into a world full of deceptive
symbols. It takes a conversion to begin to break away from the
deceptions that trap humankind, but many of the churches take their
people right back into the same mind-traps.
Page 365
Elements of the world-system & its satanic inspired quest for
Utopia.
Ordo Ab Chaos
Pyramids even with 3 equal dimensions have a bottem and a pointed top.
Top rules bottem; bottem supports/protects top
Pyramid with a mirror image = basic satanic structure
p_365-1.jpg p_365-2.jpg
Elements of God's paradise are the attributes of God which sustain the
Universe
Four true offices are pillars to this structure
- God is the Spirit of Truth (He serves as the light of New Jerusalem)
- God is the Life-Giver (the water & trees of fruit of New
Jerusalem)
- God is the Law-Giver (The New Jerusalem has a great wall &
order)
- God is Love, our Friend (the New Jerusalem has its own glory , warm
sun and worship)
- God is a consuming fire, a Judge, (The Great White Throne of the New
Jerusalem)
- God is unchanging, the same yesterday, today, and tomorrow, treats
all equal, it rains on the just and the unjust, in other words, He is
equitable.
STABILITY (a cube is solid and balanced)
Page 366 ...
The Belt of Truth mentioned as spiritual armor in Ephesians 6:3 is like
a girdle that pulls and holds things together. Belts or girdles held
things together for the ancient warrior, as well as holding the
scabbard. The Word of God says, ‘Gird up your loins..." which
means to pull yourself into the wholeness and integrity of God. The
Belt of Truth is more accurately described as the Belt of Integrity.
Integrity means being stable, without being double-minded. Satan
divides and conquers. He uses division everywhere to defeat the godly
person. Integrity means an individual’s private life lines up
and
equals his public image. There is no duplicity, no division of purpose
in this Belt. It means the wearer of this belt is solely one-minded
toward God. The Belt of Truth defends God’s ORDER of things.
The
Sword of the Spirit is the Word of God. The Spirit reveals to us truth,
both the truth of God’s scripture and the truth about other
things of God’s creation. The Sword of the Spirit protects
the
Bible from being misunderstood. We are to pray that the Spirit of God
reveals and teaches us TRUTH. The Sword of the Spirit then protects
TRUTH. God is truth, so if we seek God, we will find Him where truth
is. No wonder it says that the Truth shall set you free!
THE UNIQUE POWER OF THE TRUTH, "YE SHALL KNOW THE TRUTH AND THE TRUTH
SHALL MAKE YOU FREE"
In any type of bondage, if the full truth could be understood by the
right persons who need it in that situation, it would make us free. In
Romans 1:16, Paul states, "The Gospel is the power of God unto
salvation to the Jew first and also to the Greek". "Salvation", and
being made "free", basically have to refer to the same condition of
deliverance from bondage. Jesus Christ is "The Way, the Truth, and the
Life, no man cometh unto the Father but by Him." The "Truth" and the
"Gospel" that says "Jesus saves to the uttermost, those that come unto
Him by Faith," are mutually inclusive and if you really know one, you
will also know the other. Is the truth impossible to find? In Romans
Ch. 1 we are told that we are all without excuse because God has given
us in nature enough evidence of His power and Godhead that we are
automatically responsible for the way we seek after more light or hide
in the darkness. The Word of God says that men hide from the light
because their deeds are evil. Living in the dark makes it easy for the
"enemies" of God to capture the servants of unrighteousness who have
yielded their bodies in one way or another to the desires of the
fleshly nature with which we were all born. If we didn’t die
to
our old life when we were born again, we are like Mary’s
brother
Lazarus who was raised from the dead, but had to be loosed from the
grave clothes in order to walk and carry on life. Some people are still
bound in grave clothes and need to be set free. It takes obedience to
the Gospel to be set free, and it takes some people months or years to
understand and accept all the terms of their pardon as purchased by the
precious blood of Jesus, and they live in bondage to the extent that
they fail to claim all of their spiritual inheritance, and the gifts
that come with them. When they learn the whole truth, they find they
are set free.
OTHER ITEMS OF PROTECTION
This article has just touched briefly on two of the spiritual armors
that the Word of God says will protect us, the Belt of Truth and the
Sword of the Spirit. The Shield of Faith will protect the victim of
mind-control from the worship of idols, from worshipping the wrong
things in
Page 367 ...
our life like our handler, and will protect our true love for Almighty
God, our real creator. The Helmet of Salvation will protect the victim,
when the accuser of the brethren tries to heap guilt and insecurity
upon us. It will also help the victim to protect their birthright given
to them as a child of God. Each victim as a child of God has a
wonderful birthright to some great things, but the enemy will steal it
if they don’t protect their godly birthrights. Some victims
ignorantly given their birthrights away like Esau. As a born-again
believer the victim has a legal position IN CHRIST that makes the
person a joint-heir to the resurrection (ROM 6:3-11, EPH 2:1-5) and a
joint-heir to reign with him (2 TIM 2:12, COL. 3:4). The Breastplate of
Righteousness will protect the victim’s relationships with
their
support team, and the world in general. It will mean that they will
treat their fellow man correctly in financial dealings, legal dealings,
and any other dealing where fairness is involved. The Breastplate of
Righteousness will defend justice and equity. Equity, which is
fairness, means treating people equally. This will encourage the
programmed multiple to treat people in the same fair way that they want
others to treat their system.
We have just briefly touched on these spiritual protections. We hope
that this will stimulate the reader to search and learn more about
these spiritual weapons and how they can protect the victim from the
attacks of the enemy. Now for instance, if the reader listens to a
sermon where he is told that spiritual warfare calls for him to reject
false values, repent of sin, and resist deception, he will realize the
minister is managing to hit upon 3 of the substitutes for the 5
elements that make up God’s structure.
SPECIAL SITUATIONS WHERE SPIRITUAL PROTECTION IS NEEDED
· As internal work is done, spiritual protection will be
needed
to protect the system from the warfare and counterattacks of the
internal forces.
· The victim of mind-control will also need protection from
astral projections of their master. This protection is provided for, by
a support person using the principles of the spiritual world to slam
the astral
body back into its physical body.
· Spirits of fear, mistrust, contention, suicide and
despondency
will try to attack the victim on a regular basis. The victim and the
support persons need to be aware of these daily attacks and develop a
mind-set and a determination to spiritually refuse these spirits. The
support person should be gentle but firm in assisting the victim to
dislodge and cast out such demonic attacks. All prayer should be
grounded upon the structures of God, which are life, order, true love,
justice, equity and truth.
God is the life-giver, the creator, the healer, the savior, the father,
the peace-maker, the consoler, and the sustainer. Our prayers to Him
should be grounded in the reality that He is all these LIFE-GIVING
ROLES. This may help you understand what it means to ground our prayers
in the structure of LIFE. We are called to imitate God & also
be
life-givers in the fullest sense of the word.
WHERE WILL THE ENEMY COUNTERATTACK AFTER PROGRESS IS MADE?
The enemy will send in false teachers (1 TIM 4:1-3), or he’ll
try
to give a false reputation to the world by slandering the person before
men & before God (JOB 1 & 2 as well as other
scriptures), he
will attack the person’s confidence, their beliefs, their
relationships, and their walk with God. In other words, if one looks at
a cross, one spoke is prayer to God, one spoke is our walk
(righteousness) before God, one spoke
Page 368 ...
is our witness to others, and one spoke is our fellowship with others.
Satan will attempt to weaken anyone of these 4 arms of the cross. He
and his forces (demonic and human) will generally look for and attack
the weakest link in our defense. If we think things through it makes
sense that if Satan were to attack God’s people the best
place to
attack them is in their churches. A fierce war is being waged in the
churches today to destroy all true believers. This war is very well
conceived and well coordinated. It is not happening by accident. One of
the major weapons that the enemy uses is religious spirits of
judgement. Judgement brings death. It is one thing to expose evil, so
that healing can occur, that is godly. But the religious spirits that
judge are out to hurt and destroy. These judgemental religious spirits
are out to divide, so that Satan can conquer. We feel safe in saying
that until our books came out, including this one, the Christian
churches were totally ignorant about multiplicity and what it entails.
We have watched many multiples suffer from judgemental spirits in the
churches. These religious spirits are not from God, so don’t
let
them hurt your relationship to God. But why can Satan attack? There are
a number of spiritual reasons WHY. First, is that the programmed
multiple is traumatized and programmed during their life time to create
footholds (legal loop-holes) that give Satan the legal right to attack.
Eph. 4:27 says, "And do not give the devil an opportunity." The word
opportunity in the greek is Topos, which literally means "foothold".
These footholds are also referred to as strongholds in the mind (2 COR
10:4) which are like fortresses that Satan keeps operating in enemy
territory that allow him to attack vulnerable lines. They are like
secret holes that serpents can live in to crawl out of into your nice
garden.
The spirit that crucified Jesus was the religious spirit of judgement.
It will attack you with a vengeance. The victim and the support team
must not allow themselves to become subject to these religious spirits.
The judging religious spirits are trying to provoke the person who is
the target of their attack. These evil spirits want a reaction from
their target. The godly person can do exactly what Jesus did, let these
judgemental spirits rant and rave and after all these antics keep
one’s peace. The reaction will be, aren’t you going
to do
something about this? Just say, its a moot point, it’s not
relevant. I don’t give it credence and move on. Each victim
must
seek life-giving answers for their own situation. Don’t let
the
religious spirit of judgement steal you of your chance for life. Just
remember Jesus’s words, "Woe to you, scribes and Pharisees,
hypocrites! For you shut up the Kingdom of heaven against men; for you
neither go in yourselves, nor do you allow those who are entering to go
in." The Pharisees of today will find all the right answers to justify
their position. You as a victim must seek truth, you must seek life,
you must seek love. Forget these religious men that bind big burdens
upon people and strain at gnats. You as a little child, and what
programmed multiple isn’t mostly a child, are what the
kingdom of
God is made of. If you retaliate against the Pharisees then you have
lost, because that is what these religious spirits want, is to get you
into a battle on their territory. Even if you win that battle,
you’ve lost, because you had to leave your territory--the
peace
of God, to enter back into Satan’s domain. Don’t
fight
religious spirits, they are a sly trick of Satan to get you to step
back out of God’s domain into Satan’s boxing ring.
At that
point, you will participate in the lie that the boxing match is the
real contest. Don’t trust in yourself, even if you can win in
that boxing ring. If you know that God is with you, stay with Him in
peace.
Page 369 ...
SAFETY ISSUES, of slave
This section is an attempt to coordinate information scattered in many
different articles and chapters, as well as discuss ideas that come
under safety that are not addressed in other places, such as how to
work with child victim’s of mind-control. Other articles that
pertain to safety include:
· The Accessing article deals with safety from the
abuser’s contacts.
· The Triggers article deals with safety from all the
programming & memories that activate irregardless of whether
the
original abuser is around or not.
· The Self-inflicted harm article deals with safety issues
that derive from the victim’s own threats to themselves.
· The Communication & Trust articles deal with the
safety of the therapist-recovering slave’s relationship.
· The Deliverance & Salvation articles deal with the
spiritual safety issues.
· The Surveillance article deals with safety issues
concerning harassment and continued cult interference in life.
· The Mazes and Mirror articles deal with the safety issues
of tackling particular programming.
Safety tips will be discovered scattered through all of our books on
mind-control. The abuse of a victim is ongoing, unfortunately it was
not just yesterday, but is here today. That is why this
book’s
two authors have made a point of referring to victims of mind-control
as VICTIMS, and not as "survivors". The word "survivor" is very popular
among therapists, and the word "victim" will cause some therapists to
go into convulsive uncontrollable rage. The word is not popular. But
the word "survivor" comes along with all the denial and whitewash of
the establishment therapeutic community, that somehow this abuse
happened to a poor helpless child and now that the child is an adult,
they have survived this abuse. First, this ignores completely that the
Illuminati continue to access and use essentially all mind-control
victims that are trying to get therapeutic help, and it also ignores
the fact that 99% of the alters have no concept that they are an adult,
but if anything still see themselves as children. The high percentage
of child alters is never realized by novice therapists, because the
adults protect and hide them. A safe house is a place where a victim
can go to stay from dusk to dawn in safety or even better a safe place
to live. Generally, when safe places have been discussed it has been
the goal to keep plans discrete and only on a need to know basis. A
safe house will not take the place of a hospital, but the option of
placing victims in hospitals is a very risky last resort. It would be
great if safe houses could be set up with qualified therapists and
trained volunteers who recognize the unique safety needs of victims.
This would give recovering victims an opportunity to gain strength as
they fought the internal lies and the dissociation. Such issues as How
much does it cost?, What does the victim bring?, How does on keep a
victim from acting out programs?, Do you force the person to stay if
they want to leave, Do you have inhouse rules?, Who handles the
medication? Can the victim receive visitors? and who and when? What
kind of special dietary needs does the victim have? A safe house can
not possibly cover all the safety needs of a victim. The Illuminati
have traditionally threatened their families, their pets, their
reputations and their jobs. The author has seen the Illuminati make
good on some of their threats, but generally they threaten and
intimidate more than actually act. A major issue is feeling abandoned
and alone. A support person will achieve the best calming effects if
they can maintain a constant
Page 370 ...
presence with the recovering victim. When the support person or
therapist is absent, life becomes a terrifying experience, and the fear
the victim lives in while alone can make a few hours seem like eternity.
THE SAFETY OF CHILD VICTIMS
Fritz & this author Cisco have had to resist the opportunity to
help some young victims of mind-control because we knew that helping
them would put their lives at great risk. There are certain ages that
if the child or teenager has not progressed to the point that they are
expected, they will be killed by the Illuminati. Children who are
multiples have treatment needs that are different than adults. The
first problem that must be faced is that the child’s parents
or
caregivers should be involved in the treatment, but the odds are
extremely high that they are dirty and part of the abuse, no matter how
well or to what extent they deny it. It goes without saying that the
therapist needs to be able to handle the emotional trauma of helping
child abuse victims. It may be harder than working with adults, because
the therapist is face to face with the helplessness of the child, who
is confronted with a powerful evil system of enormous magnitude. The
skilled therapist will study the child’s interaction with
others,
on the playground, with other children, at home, and when the child is
alone. They will watch for strange aberrant interaction between the
parents and the child. The therapist will also watch the
child’s
eyes to see how they interact with other people, or if the child tries
not to look at adults. The child may have a dull apathetic dissociative
look to their face, or simply a blank look, or a glazed look. Check to
see if they have puffy bags or dark eye circles. When the child has
suffered the abuse of the trauma-based mind-control hallucinations, a
desire to hurt themselves, and disturbed responses to heat, cold, pain
and enclosures. A multiple will have erratic grades and abilities,
their grades may be low compared to their 1.0. And they may be tired or
hyper in school. Popular cover stories to cover programming sessions
for children are tonsillectomies, esp. emergency tonsillectomies. Also
sending the child to specialists may be a cover, or taking the child to
a "funeral". The child will be shown funeral pictures and told that it
was there. They like to isolate the child from playing with other
children too. The poor child victim of mind-control will not have the
words to sort out the coexistent feelings of love and hate for the
victim’s abusive parents. They also do not have the language
capabilities to describe their feelings and emotions. Guilt may simply
be expressed as, "It just doesn’t feel good." If the
therapist is
going to help a child victim of mind-control they need to communicate
to the child that as a big person they will be gentle but that they
have the unchangeable strength to protect the child and care for the
child. "I will help you be O.K., and I will protect you." The therapist
should also convey to the child that "I know it was not your fault." "I
am able to hear what you have to say without being wiped out or
shattered." "We will do this together." "I know you are going to be
O.K." If the child realizes that he or she can be safe with the
therapist, the child may begin to warm up to others too. As the child
feels valued, it will feel safe enough to talk about things a little.
Page 371 ...
SAFETY ISSUES, of support team
During the many years that your author Cisco has observed people trying
to help programmed multiples, we have seen a range of counter-attacks
by the World Order.
PRECAUTIONS
Find out how the Network operates and what organizations are part of
it. Fritz has some excellent information on this. Do not trust law
enforcement. We have seen victims get conned by seemingly "well
intentioned" law enforcement people who deal with cults as part of
their job. If you feel like our warning is hysteria, then you are
welcome to "reinvent the wheel." An example of how victims of
mind-control will be treated is told in the front of Mark
Phillip’s and Cathy O’Brien’s book
Transformation of
America. In the front of their book they provide the business cards of
some of the law enforcement people who were dirty and stabbed them in
the back as they attempted to get her daughter free and to get justice.
Cathy and Mark travelled all over this nation in search of justice--it
isn’t there. We will not provide a long litany of horror
stories,
for no amount of proof will convince those who are still trapped in
their own mind-control that the our judicial system still works for the
people. The Illuminati’s Network is victimizing America at
will.
Do not trust the establishment media. They are great at manipulating
stories to discredit the truth. The institutions that America has
trusted in have long been subverted by the Illuminati.
THE BAD NEWS
Typically, the Network (what the abusers call themselves) will try to
publicly discredit anyone who opposes them. Today, a popular way to do
this, is to infiltrate a programmed multiple (who is programmed with an
ulterior agenda) into therapy and then take the therapist down with the
cry "false memories were implanted". The victim needs to be worked with
in such a way that they recover their own memories and the therapist
has this validated. Several conferences around the country have gone
into detail about the ins and outs of legally protecting oneself. Fritz
& this author provide our assistance to victims gratis. We
suggest
that others might consider simply doing this. The therapist may get
their office files broken into, and in a few extreme cases the
therapists have actually been murdered. Some support people (incl.
therapists) have had their personal lives disrupted. Their spouses
leave them, they are poisoned (such as what happened in L.A. as well as
other places), their automobiles break down (sometimes with obvious
signs of tampering), and they find opportunities in the world shutting
in their faces.
THE GOOD NEWS
The persecution of good people exposes to the world what is going on.
Recently, a person who only half believed our material showed it at the
university where they taught. The immediate & overwhelming
negative
persecution that came was so obviously an overreaction if the material
had been false, that the persecution made a believer out of this
truth-seeking person. Every time the enemy exposes himself to persecute
our side, he exposes himself. In a war, the enemy exposes his position
when he shoots at you. You can fool some of the people some of the
time, and some of the people all of the time, but you can’t
fool
all of the people all of the time.
PROCEDURES for an Assassination The Illuminati members must get the
Page 372 ...
Grand Druid Council’s approval for an Illuminati
assassination of
one of their slaves, etc. Therefore, the Illuminati handlers often get
other groups like the Mafia to do the dirty work. In other words, the
Illuminati is not just running wild wiping people off the face of the
earth. Their control is very planned out and systematic. Up until
recently, they had never lost a slave to freedom, so they still
don’t really consider our side to be a viable threat. While
our
side painstakingly rescues an individual here or there, they continue
to program tens of thousands. They have stayed ahead of their
opposition, and even created much of their own opposition. They will
take advantage of a person’s weak points. They will put a
great
deal of study into where a person is weak, and take him or her down at
that weak point. They will also look for routines. A routine is
something that is a natural setup for exploitation. They will also try
to divide and conquer. If they can separate a person out and isolate a
person, they will go in for the "kill."
BALANCE
The support team needs to develop a strong spiritual walk where they
are not a leaf in the wind to every scare tactic the Network carries
out. The Illuminati’s Network thrives on scare tactics and
fear.
On the other hand, the support team needs to have a well-informed
understanding of the capabilities of the other side. There is nothing
to be gained from being reckless. Prudent precautions are worth a great
deal. The saying a ounce of prevention is worth a pound of cure is very
accurate. If the support team is negligent or sloppy just one day out
of the year, it will be that day that the victim is reaccessed. The
Illuminati will watch for months, waiting for their chance to grab the
victim. Most people don’t realize that they will exercise
that
much patience. The therapist & victim figures if they
haven’t
been bothered for a while that they are out of the woods. The support
team needs to realize that all victims have been stripped of their
ability to see danger from their abusers. This is so important it bears
repeating: The support team needs to realize that all victims have been
stripped of their ability to see danger from their abusers. Those on
the support team should not let their guard down simply because other
victims don’t seem to have to protect themselves. First, the
few
victims that are public may not be telling what happens to them. And
second, if victims are not telling about constant surveillance,
constant harassment, and constant attempts at reaccessing and
reprogramming, then please draw the obvious conclusions.
Page 373 ...
First, it should be recognized that every victim of mind-control has to
make a choice whether to fight for freedom or not. If they do not make
this choice at some level, they will not have the commitment to try and
counter the powerful self-destruct programs that are layered in.
Freedom for a mind-controlled slave can only result from total
commitment to the slave’s freedom by the therapist and a
strong
commitment on the part of at least a few alters within the system.
Neither the slave nor the therapist can do all the work. Therapists are
often totally surprised at how intense self-destructive
system-persecutor alters will hate the host alter and how determined
and intensely they will inflict harm upon the body. This is because
they are still not realizing how almost all DID victims are programmed
structured MPD (DID) slaves. Nor have most therapists come to grips
with how intense the programming is that created these "system
persecutor" alters. The "system persecutor" alters believe that they
are protecting from greater harm, and in that sense they are more
accurately described as "protectors’’. Most
protectors are
simply frightened children who are filled with rage. They may also
surface with obnoxious belligerence, for instance, they may spit in the
therapist’s face. The therapist or support team member must
simply stay calm. Try to "bore the protector alter to death" with your
calmness. The therapist needs to dig deep into their surplus of love
and compassion and realize that this is just a wounded, hurting
programmed child. The therapist needs to validate their role, and their
feelings. They are not designed to hold the body for great lengths of
time, and will get tired holding the body for long lengths of time.
Many protector alters if they are allowed to surface, and ventilate
their thoughts, and work through their feelings, fears and programming
can return to the internal world with their destructive programmed
behavior defused. If the therapist makes the mistake of trying to lock
such an alter up, rather than negotiate and work them through their
programmed destructive misbehavior, then a serious power struggle and a
bigger mess could result. Sometimes if they are allowed to act out, for
instance, a cutting alter is allowed to cut--but with dull plastic
scissors, they can feel like they have done their job and go back
inside. The protector alters believe that they are doing their job by
protecting secrets. This lie can be exposed when working with them.
Because they may have strong demonic elements attached to them, they
will usually need some spiritual deliverance. Many therapists have
asked their systems to make contracts "I will not hurt myself..." It is
important that the therapist establish groundwork, a platform upon
which to work from. Contracts have been more successful than not having
contracts, but the therapists need to go beyond simply making
contracts. Contracts only work with the front of a system, and the host
alter is usually very dissociated from the deeper part of the system.
First, the therapist needs to work with the front, the host
personality, to make them aware of the self-inflicting-harm programs
that will go off. It is important that the host personality learns his
or her triggers, learns how to help identify protector alters within
the system, and to help creatively discover methods to negotiate with
the protectors. The host or therapist might ask, "Do you really think
you need to inflict harm? Are you really bad or have you just been told
that? Do you know that even [clowns, rabbits, kittens, horses...] do
not hurt themselves?" Try to find the human part of the person. It is
always there - even though it may be very remote. Work with the
survival instincts of every alter. "Did you know that kittens
don’t hurt themselves?" Try to get them NOT to act like the
cult,
but to have new behavior. Try and reframe the abuse cycle,
Page 374 ...
so that they see it in another light. The little protector alters may
present a hard outer shell, but deep down are just fearful little
special purpose fragments that are doing the job they have been trained
by behavior modification to do. The entire support team as well as some
of the alters can cooperate in repeating triggers so that they can be
defused. It is important that triggers are not found out the hard way.
What will be automatic triggers? Across the board, the programmers have
put in heavy-duty protector alters and self-destruct programs to
protect the victim from dealing with all past mother and father issues,
in other words from really seeing their childhood. As long as the host
alter stays in the here and now, they are "fine" in terms of not
triggering the self-harm programming. This is so that the host (front)
alter will not go down through the layers. Two other important areas
that have lots of protectors are the core, and the no-talk programs. Of
course, the abuse will create many of its own natural "self-hate"
problems for alters. One way to defuse the self-destruct programs is
for the therapist to take the victim down to a level 4 trance or deeper
and use the Universal Codes that were given in Vol. 2. Those are the
actual universal (standard) codes, but they only work if the therapist
has the alter deep enough into trance. The programmers have built in a
wall that will bounce the codes off, if the alter is not deep enough
into trance. (As far as we know, these universal codes
haven’t
been changed. This is part of the problem with giving answers, is that
before the therapeutic community picks up on the answers, the other
side has had time to react.) The programmers create jokers and
scrambling alters to insure that code words said above a level 4 trance
never have effect. The code words become merely garbled words, that
bounce off the system. When triggers do go off, they trip off a domino
effect, so that soon whole groups of alters are immersed into all kinds
of self-destruct programs. The therapists need to understand that when
a single trigger goes off, there is likely to be several self-destruct
programs triggered. Most therapists are not aware of what happens
deeper in the system. Internal and external abuse is often triggered on
a regular basis by the work that is being done, and the therapists and
the host personality are generally oblivious to it all. The host may be
so dissociative they do not know why their leg or foot hurt. They may
not realize why it hurts to urinate. Female slaves often cut their
vagina up. Male slaves often simply shoot themselves. There are few
male slaves that survive the suicide programs, due to the cold logic of
their programmed minds. Front alters may not know there are suicidal
parts, they then fall asleep, out pops a suicidal alter and the system
may die of a heart attack. The potential for self-inflicted harm is
present across the board in everything the victim tries to do. The
victim will sabotage their credibility, their therapy, the love and
trust of others, and their own successes. The therapist needs to be
prepared for such things happening and not let them side-track the
therapist from what needs to be done--WHICH is to show love, and care
toward the victim. The therapist may feel like this is calling for
superhuman endurance, and sometimes it does, so the therapist needs to
learn new behavior--how to endure in the face of repeated failure, and
keep on keeping on. When fresh memories surface, and when new alters
surface, the programming has the same fresh power as when it was
originally put in. The stronger alters need work done with them so that
they will be prepared to handle the burden of the power of new
self-destruct programs hitting the system when new material and new
alters are revealed. The few strong front alters can create safe places
internally where they can nurture
Page 375 ...
more vulnerable "weaker" alters. These safe places must be deep enough
so that they don’t trigger whoever is holding the body. (To
get
to this point, pre-supposes that the therapist has a few strong front
alters that can help out in therapy.) The feelings of abuse and anxiety
of the new alters can be placed into a box while they are in the
recovery room. The recovery room system can be similar to how hospitals
take the person out of surgery into monitoring rooms, and then finally
to their hospital bedrooms, and then finally they are let out for
outpatient observation. The internal recovery room can have pillows,
and other gentle things within it.
SPIRITUAL ISSUES
There are numerous Spiritual issues that confront the victim, and many
of these issues may be the most critical factors in the improvement and
healing of the victim. However, it has been hard for most people to
separate religion from spirituality. One of the most powerful tools of
the Illuminati for controlling people are the various religious fronts
that they have created. The mainstream religious groups are but fronts
to control people. Within religion you will find controlling spirits,
judging spirits, spirits of denial, spirits of guilt and shame, and
spirits of obesity. Not all obesity is from a spirit of obesity, but
obesity (gluttony) seems to be the sin that is used to substitute in
for the other things that are rejected as sin. God’s creative
force works within the universe. We are meant to be like God. He gave
each of us some creativity. We can creatively take responsibility for
our own lives and our own walk with God and our own spiritual growth.
God gave each of us free will. Sad to say, but these important gifts,
are often surrendered by religious slaves to whatever organization
controls them. They give up their creativity and free will. They seem
to think God wanted them to be a little puppet. The puppet mentality
likes black & white orders, and black & white thinking,
because
it removes responsibility for the puppet’s actions away from
the
puppet. Again God made it clear, He was going to make each person
accountable. There is no one else who can answer for you, when you face
God. Religion can be one of the best covers to hide the stench of
trauma-based mind-control. Under the guise of religion, the pressure to
look good--to look like the organization’s "approved
solution"
conspires to cover up the truth, real feelings, failure, and sin.
Religion can be so stiffling it becomes a pressure cooker. In order to
make reality fit the religious mold a great deal energy is put into
fantasy and denial. A great deal is done in the name of God that has
nothing to do with Him. A great deal of how the Illuminati keep their
slaves in place under their control is that they overlay the deeper
levels of mind-control with the absolute control over the front system
by one of their numerous religious denominations, such as the Catholic
Church, the Mormon Church, the Watchtower Society, many Pentecostal
groups, authoritarian New Age groups, and other religious groups too
numerous to mention here. These groups emotionally strip their victims,
and create a dependence within their members upon their church
hierarchy. Christ came to set the captives free, and from his ministry
it is clear that many of the people he set free were captives to
religion. One of the greatest spiritual steps is to take back what God
gave you and use it like He intended. Many mind-control victims
can’t move forward toward freedom, because the religious
group
that controls them won’t give them their basic God-given
freedoms, abilities, and free-will. The Illuminati doesn’t
have
to depend solely upon the mind-control programming, their religious
groups will do the day to day work for them all in the name of God.
Page 376 ...
STRUCTURING, how it is done, its consequences and its treatment (an
intermediate issue for helpers)
It is important that the people helping a victim of total mind-control
understand that the slave has had his or her mind and thinking totally
structured. Structuring means that the person’s mind is
complex.
Illuminati slaves usually have thousands of alters. Usually, therapists
play around with the surface alters of a front world, who even after a
decade or two of therapy will have very little idea of the full story
of how their body and mind is being used. Structuring is the bracing
that holds the programming structure in place. If the programs are the
plywood, tile, shingles, and the other material, then structuring is
the engineering, the design, the bracing that puts the materials
together in a firm workable manner. Another article "Multiplicity,
understanding it" will deal with aspect of understanding the parts that
build the house. Structuring means that each alter has its script or
way of thinking. Everything is cut and dry, black and white. If life
challenges the alter’s thinking it will either a. dissociate
the
information it can’t reconcile with its script, or b. switch
to
another alter who can deal with thoughts. The switching is so ingrained
within the mind, that it is hard for the mind to prevent it, but the
mind can be trained to stay in place; not dissociate and learn material
outside of its script, but it takes effort and time. This is why is
good to journal, map the system, and keep other written records because
the mind of an alter of a slave has a powerful tendency over time to
continue dissociating whatever is not part of its script. The black and
white thinking makes it difficult to deal with complex issues. An
example of that would be for instance, a critical comment by a
therapist on one tiny aspect of work which may be interpreted by the
victim as rejection of their work. Structuring means the victim (the
victim’s alter system) is not allowed to know or see anything
but
what they are to know and see. The concept of Multiple Personalities is
difficult enough for the therapist to manage, let alone the puzzle of a
labyrinth system of alters who are entangled in thousands of secret
scripts that all work as one vast interconnected machine. In
understanding the structuring, therapists should be aware of dual and
triple functions. The external function of an alter will not coincide
with the internal function. The alters will relate to each other in a
complex way, similar to the complex ways a city of persons relate to
each other. Each system will have its own internal political setup, and
sometimes internal politics as alters begin trying to change the
structure. Everyone hates to be stereotyped, even alters. Even though
alters are programmed and structured, so are most people in the
external world, and no one likes to be told they are programmed and
structured. But just as a mother acts like a mother, and a prostitute
acts like a prostitute, different alters which are common features of
all systems will be recognizable. And although the host alter will
quickly be known, often the host alter is actually several co-conscious
alters, who will emerge with their own identity during treatment. The
host may be one of the hardest alters to get to admit to the MPD (DID).
One of the primary bracing devices used in structuring is FEAR, for
instance,
Page 377 ...
fear of being found out and considered insane or a criminal, fear of
remembering the traumas, fear of the pain. Another primary bracing
material is the dissociation from one’s emotions. Without the
emotions around a memory, the memory is a stale fact with no more
impact than some statistic about Outer Slavakia, and the programming
remains intact. When the affect (the emotions) return to the alters
when they do memory work, it re-humanizes them. Humans have emotions,
and that is what the alters need to regain. Emotions make the memories
real. During the structuring, alters that had to have special
responsibilities in the outside world, or had to have special cult
responsibilities have had to have special programs tactics done so that
they will not have emotions. The mother cats will have special shadow
alters that take their emotions. The alters that take the affect of the
trauma, are not but to sleep, because they need to be handy to continue
siphoning off the emotions of any new experiences. The emotions must be
kept separate by the Programmers so that there are no weak links. The
spinners will have absolutely no emotions. Deep down in the spinner
area each cat family will have some emotion alters carefully hidden.
The alters systems are structured not to have emotion. Logic
(luciferian logic) is a great stabilizer. Much of the beginning
structuring to remove emotions from the alters begins in the cages,
where the dehumanization starts. The child in the cages (this trauma is
described in several places) is deprived of everything, isolated,
whipped, shocked, prodded, raped, etc. After that period in the cages,
the child moves on to the next stage where they are caged near animals
(such as cats) which are treated wonderfully. The child is encouraged
to act like a cat. The child is behavior modified to become a cat. This
early part of the programming is designed to split off the emotions and
take the alters back to their animal survival instinctual level of
thinking (that means thinking with only their reptilian brain.)
In order to regain their emotions, memories may have to be seen with
their emotions from a great distance, and reviewed on an ever-closer
screen many times, until the alter(s) are desensitized enough to the
memory to look at it close up. To get in touch with one’s
emotions, will cause alters to be suicidal. The therapist will have to
separate out mirror images, and the false memories that have been laid
in. (Unfortunately, memories usually surf ace with a lot of baloney.)
Then the therapist will have to encourage the feeling parts to come up.
The feeling parts weep, sob, have broken hearts and much suffering.
They may have anger, fear, and panic. The hurting part may be a
screamer. It may not have a name, or might even be called screamer. It
is probably a small child stripped of its identity. This small child
has never had a chance to express itself. It probably feels that if it
expressed itself. it would drown the world in tears. The structuring is
designed to incorporate anything that will help create a feeling, an
atmosphere of helplessness. If the therapist can give power back to the
alters, this will help them take responsibility for themselves rather
than looking to the master.
Page 378 ...
Without a doubt, people who have been subjected to Illum./govt.
mind-control have suffered and continue to suffer. It’s no
surprise to find suffering in these people’s lives; they are
masters at suffering. They often have very high pain tolerances. The
fact that they are continueing to suffer, creates a multitude of
spin-off problems for the victim. Rather than deal with the spin-off
problems, the therapist or helper may want to deal with the issue of
suffering itself. The Word of God says, "Many are the afflictions of
the righteous." PS 34:19. Therapists & ministers should be
careful
not to blame the victim’s problems on victim. Ministers need
to
be reminded that not all suffering is the result of personal sin. Much
of what happens is simply the result of living in a fallen world. In
real life, many of life’s stories do not have a happy ending.
Bitterness toward God is dangerous, because it leads to all types of
problems emotionally. The therapist & victim should avoid
blaming
God. If the client wants to delve into having a deeper understanding of
why evil & suffering exists, then they should by all means be
encouraged to find a book that answers this, or to contact this
book’s authors. In the beginning God described everything as
"exceedingly good", but the fall of man has echoed down the centuries.
A deep understanding of God’s justice will explain why
suffering
exists. A deep understanding of God’s love explains why God
allows suffering and pain. We can not assume to know the answer to each
tragedy or pain, yet we can still help alleviate the suffering. Today,
pain clinics teach people ways to cope with pain, and so does this page.
First, dear therapist, treat the person who is suffering as you would
want to be treated if you were undergoing what they are experiencing.
Unfortunately, few therapists have had much inkling of the extent of
the trauma & suffering that their clients who were victims of
trauma-based mind-control continue to experience. This is very evident,
because until recently, therapists have had little concern for the
safety of their clients once they have stepped outside the
therapist’s office. Ongoing victims of mind-control have been
popularly labelled "survivors of SRA" by the therapeutic community, and
yet so far neither Fritz nor this author, Cisco, has ever seen someone
who is past having to suffer. These are not "survivors" of some past
abuse, they continue to be ongoing victims, and not of their own
choice. The helper should evaluate the suffering, its causes, its
purposes & benefits. Although all things work together for good
to
those who love Almighty God, not all things are good. It is not wise or
benevolent to lecture the sufferer on the edification he will receive
from the pain he is experiencing. In the long run perhaps the victim
will see that the suffering can bring joy, enhance one’s
future
glory, yield greater wisdom, produce true humility and true comfort. If
the victim is a devout Christian, they may already be able to see the
silver lining to the cloud. However, the helper/ therapist wants to
find ways to alleviate the emotional suffering & lesson the
pain.
Ignoring or belittling it, or heaping more shame or guilt upon the
person is like rubbing salt into the wound. Once the suffering is
identified, the therapist should free the victim from their shame.
After Adam & Eve sinned & got their lives into trouble,
God
still made clothes from skins to hide their shame.
Page 379 ...
SUFFERING (client complaint)
Allow client to express his pain.
Treat the client as you would want
to be treated in similar circumstances.
Let the client confront their own pain.
DO: a. allow people to express their pain. b. let people confront their
own pain, c. be with the sufferer in silent caring. d. be a cheerful
heart,
give kind words for the health of the body, mind and spirit, e. free
the
client from the shame of suffering.
DON’T: a. assume you know the answer to every tragedy or
pain,
b. lecture the client about the blessings they will receive from the
suffering, c. shame the client.
FINALLY:
Point the person to the goodness and strength of God, for: IF THE
LORD DOES NOT BUILD THE HOUSE, THOSE WHO LABOR BUILDING IT LABOR IN
VAIN. No client can resist the suffering in their own strength, they
need the strength and consolation of a higher power, God.
Page 380 ...
SUICIDAL THOUGHTS (early client complaint)
Suicide is an ongoing threat to ALL victims of total mind-control. All
victims of total mind-control have strong suicide programs that are
activated if they learn or talk about anything that has gone on in
their life, except what the programmers want the victim & world
to
know about. Therapists have greatly underestimated how suicidal victims
of mind-control are once they begin moving toward freedom. Most alter
systems are designed to have a calm front. The front alters can be very
calm and stable, while all hell is breaking lose on the inside. Nor do
the front alters have the ability to see what is happening behind/under
them. Threats of suicide can be broken down into immediate threats that
require immediate intervention, & long term therapy. Because
all
victims of total mind-control are suicidal 24 hours a day once they
begin work, therapists should assume that ALL VICTIMS are always a few
thoughts & seconds away from suicide. This is why a support
person
should be around a mind-control victim 24-hrs a day to support the
client & to protect the client from his own suicidal tendency.
Suicidal thoughts & suicidal alters are programmed into a
slave.
These pose an ongoing threat. BUT there is another threat that can
overwhelm the victim. This is the accumulation of all the horror
&
trauma that the mind is dealing with. The victim must also deal with
his own guilt, with the abuse cycle which kicks in & says,
"It’s all your fault." Suicide may a fear of living, a
feeling of
hopelessness. When it comes to suicidal thoughts, sometimes
mind-control victims display the same clues as non-victims. These clues
might be the verbal clues such as "life is not worth living",
"I’m in the way", and "I would be better off dead." Indirect
talk
of having a friend who wants to commit suicide might also be a clue.
They might also have the behavior clues of being depressed, buying a
gun, drugs, or a rope. Another clue might be writing a will while
depressed. The victim of mind-control will also display in their
handwriting a number of clues showing depression and suicide, such as a
higher than norm frequency of "x’s" throughout the letter
formations. The immediate response of some therapists is to place the
mind-control victim into a hospital, but hospital settings usually
back-fire & trigger even stronger suicidal behavior, due to
many
programming/memory issues involved. The hospital should be a place of
last resort, and then only under the most ultra-extreme cases.
Hospitalization has its own set of considerations to be taken into
account for the victim. During an immediate crisis, a suicide alter can
be given something in which to act out their suicide desires, such as a
plastic gun to do russian roulette, or they can be dealt with so they
feel they have done their job well enough without actually killing the
body. The therapist/support person needs to have the love to listen to
the victim, & show genuine concern. The support person can
determine what pressures (prog., emot., work, financial, memories,
etc.) have built up to cause the suicidal tendency & see if
some of
these can be diffused. If a non-suicide alter is contemplating suicide,
they can be temporarily distracted until the crisis is over by asking
them to genuinely help the support person with something. This alters
self-esteem should be encouraged, because the alter is probably tapping
into all the negative images they have had drilled into the
system’s head.
Page 381 ...
SUICIDAL THOUGHTS (early client complaint)
IMMEDIATE SUICIDE THREAT
Genuinely listen to the person with love and concern.
Is this a suicide alter or a despondent non-suicide alter thinking
about suicide? ®YES®
Deal with this special purpose alter by getting it
to
restrain from killing the body and to return inside the body. Be sure
to praise this alter, who is most likely a highly programmed child
purpose alter.
NO
Size up the situation:
· Listen for verbal clues to suicide
· Look at how much agitation & stress exists
· Watch the person’s communication for goals, for
feelings of rejection, or guilt
· Ask about behavioral clues to suicide, such plans
& equipment
· Ask about pressures that could have built up to cause the
suicidal thoughts, incl. med. pressures and drugs.
· Brainstorm how you as a support person can bear this
person’s burden (GAL 6:2) & how others might help
relieve
some of the pressure driving the person to suicide.
· If inspired pray, if nothing else give HOPE.
Give:
· Hope & emotional strength & praise
· Positive encouragment
· Positive distractions, such as ask for help from the
victim.
LONG TERM WORK
Work on:
· Dealing with hurting, rejected or crying parts
· Learning how to cope with what’s been done
· Seeing what is behind the suicidal depression
· Untangle the confusion of feelings
· Pace the disclosure of traumatic material
· The no-talk messages and the no see messages.
· Seeing programs and memories via journaling, art, etc.
· The many fears, esp. the fear of one’s own anger.
· Rage issues, trust issues, denial issues, spiritual issues.
· Realize that the suicide thinking can be helped more by
one’s attitude than hoping to change the external situations
of
life.
· Find the positives, "It’s a positive that
I’m taking this little step." Live minute by minute.
· Don’t worry about tommorrow. If you make it thru
today, then its a. good chance you’ll survive tomorrow.
Page 382 ...
SUPPORT TEAM, organizing one
The ESSENTIALS OF SINCERE HELP
S Safety
I Information
N And
C Creative
E Eject, erase, eliminate, expel the PDE/computers
R Realize
E Emancipation
ATTRIBUTES of a SUCCESSFUL TEAM
T Together
E Easily understood goals
A Attainable but challenging goals
M Measurable goals
G Good solutions
O On the spot rewards
A Applied creativity & risk taking
L Loytalty to team & goals
The slogan "If you want to get something done right, you have to do it
yourself’ reflects the independent spirit of Americans. In
some
situations, the rugged Rambo is the best solution. The overwhelming
needs of a programmed multiple who has not just cities but worlds of
alters are too much for a single support person. The overwhelming needs
of the multiple to stay safe 24 hours a day are too much for a single
support person. The skills needed to tackle the challenges soon wear
out a single person. There is great wisdom is setting up teams (whether
formal or informal) to work with programmed multiples. Fritz and I have
done this quite a few times in therapy. The rewards have been extremely
gratifying. We still have a great deal to learn. Fritz and I are
working as a team on this book and on this article. Other people have
assisted us too. Fritz brings his skills and I bring my skills and
together our contributions are worth much more than if we each worked
separately. Teamwork brings varied experiences and complementary skills
together. The mix of skills and insights enriches the therapeutic
process, and adds flexibility to the process. Teams can respond to a
changing situation far better than an individual. Over and over we have
seen that one person catches a clue to what a victim is trying to say,
while another team member is mentally distracted or fails to catch the
clue. A team is not created to create a team. A team is created as a
means to an end. A team needs a goal and needs to perform. A team can
handle one victim at a time. One thing that we have seen work well was
to make a large banner of the goal for the victim during a particular
session. For instance, when work was done with our gatekeepers who were
locked up in heavy programming the goal was "To discover the true
self." When goals are chosen they need to be results, not activities.
The victim and the team will perform best if they have goals. When
working on a goal, seek quality rather than deadlines, because the
foundation of the team is performance. If the team performs, it will
build everyone up, and foster more team spirit. If the team
doesn’t perform its very reason for existing is in question.
When
setting goals, perhaps the goal can be defusing a particular type of
programming. Or perhaps the goal is to uncover the multiplicity of the
victim. The team members need to be given a chance for personal growth.
The team should share ideas. The team should have fun together. The
team can switch roles, or help each other learn. Each person on a team
needs to be given some status. The alters of a system also are part of
the team. Each individual is valued for what they can contribute.
Don’t forget to assign each team member a significant role,
and
to assign meaningful significant goals for the team. Divide up job
responsibilities so that success can only result if everyone pulls
together. As time goes on responsibilities can be rotated so that
personal growth between
Page 383 ...
various specialists occurs. One person on the support team can reward
the alter system when they achieve a goal. A trip to an aquarium, or to
a park, or something special that the alter system has never been able
to do may be a significant reward. The therapy should be fun. When
teams work around the clock, they need to be very wise &
careful
about how hard they push, and when stopping is too soon. (When one is
in the middle one has to continue to a breakthrough.) An alter system
can only process so much so fast. After several days to accomplish a
goal, and a day to reward the goal, then a break should be taken before
hard work again. The recovering victim may also be able to find a
situation where they show to themselves their new growth. At present
some therapists are working several days alone to achieve major
breakthroughs, at least this is what has been reported. However, we
have never heard of any follow-up for these victims. Without proper
followup and long term protection and long-term work, we seriously
doubt that much will really be accomplished beyond an impressive yo-yo
effect. The Mungadze Association (817-354-1389) & Care, Inc.,
are 2
groups using Christian principles & support teams &
safe houses
to help programmed multiples. The two groups are some of the best
examples of what has been done. Who is qualified for a team? The most
important criteria is commitment to the goal. If someone is seriously
committed to contribute toward a common team goal, then they are worth
having on the team. But Americans (including the American churches)
tend to want short term answers. Short-term patchwork jobs just do not
hold up in deprogramming slaves. We need to have concern for the long
term for anything effective. That takes commitment. A programmed DID
does not want to "expose their guts on the operating table if the
doctor and nurses are going to walk out in the middle of surgery." If a
team member is seriously committed to the goal, they will work harder
to overcome the barriers and obstacles in working with other team
members. When the team overcomes an obstacle, a natural outgrowth of
that is team spirit. Team spirit isn’t artificially made, it
is a
by-product of a successful team. To focus on "building a team" is the
wrong goal. The commitment (strongly willed) is to the therapeutic
goal. Teams that are highly committed to each other personally are the
best high-performance teams. Too often we have focused on the head
(talents), or the hands (work produced) and not seen the heart
(spirit). The love and good spirit of a support team are really the
best leadership qualities that can be brought to a team.
Don’t
misunderstand, a team will invest in creating an ongoing committed
well-skilled group, but they don’t make the team an end in
itself. Bring together team members who have deep trust and respect for
each other. Bring together a female mother-figure therapist and a male
father-figure therapist. At some point team members must have some type
of discipline and accountability. There has to be some type of
structure. (A team member can’t do a job half-way and then
decide
that they are finished. Nor should other members try to push other team
members off the team before the goal is achieved.) That
doesn’t
mean the structure can’t be flexible. A team should be what
is
needed for the job. Numbers are not important, commitment is. Of course
the therapeutic team needs to take into account that the spiritual
dynamics, the psychological dynamics and the safety needs of the client
need to have specialists who will be committed to these jobs. The most
successful team will be one where there is no rule "Don’t do
anything wrong." Everyone on the team will make mistakes, but that is
O.K. because those mistakes can be learned from and can promote
personal growth. The team needs to promote
Page 384 ...
the personal growth of its members too. The team should not waste time
on small risks, but go for the gusto. Be creative. Create an informal
environment where everyone is relaxed. Take risks, but don’t
be
foolhardy daredevils. The team needs to be committed to new
innovations. Pride in what a member knows will go before the fall.
Programmed multiple systems are full of surprises. What if team members
argue? Get them together immediately and ask them how this conflict is
going to help the victim? "Let’s work together. The victim
needs
to see the people she looks up to being committed to the
victim’s
freedom, and not some non-relevant viewpoint." Competition between the
team members will be counterproductive. The team is not being assembled
to win a contest or a race. The victim will contribute lots of ideas,
and a great deal of sensitivity and patience needs to be forthcoming
from the support team to allow the recovering victim to be the center
of the teamwork. However, an alter system is not set up to help itself,
and it will need some external input. Devote time to what is
successful. Brainstorm alternatives. Ask team members how they feel
they can contribute to a goal. Ask the client, "What would you like to
do that we aren’t doing?" If the place to work provides a
nearby
spot to relax, it will provide the client and the rest of the support
team a chance to relax and diffuse some of the tension. The means
creatively looking for good safe houses or good offices to use for
therapy. Treat each other on the team with equality. This
doesn’t
mean that a person’s skills are not to be respected, it means
that all have a shared sense of mission and all are important. The
example of team work and cooperation will also be beneficial for the
alters. It will give them examples to build on, that they can apply to
creating internal cooperation. Somehow the team needs to give space so
that members can vent their concerns. Some of the problems therapeutic
teams can develop is when concerns are stifled. This means others must
be restrained from interrupting. Practicing a forgiving spirit between
team members will also give alters a good example to draw from. The
team needs to be as open as possible without any secret agreements
between people. The recovering victim needs to see that they are part
of the process. In many cases, it is very difficult to speak about
particular therapeutic paths, when that will only trigger resistance
and programming prior to the onset of a session. For this reason, goals
can be stated but particular methods are best devised as the process
unfolds. It is not productive to make the recovering victim feel
powerless. On the flip side, some alter systems will entertain a spirit
of control, and this spirit will have to be firmiy and gently rebuked.
As the team works on their goal, they will have to navigate through the
following rapids, how do we deal with differences of opinion?, What do
we do when one is upset?, What do other team members like? How does one
handle feelings? In the end, these are all issues that alter systems
have to work out amongst themselves too in order to succeed. Remember
the four essential areas of help: Safety, the Victim getting to know
themselves, Building the positives, and dismantling foundation
programming & the PDE. The support team needs to determine how
the
victim can establish safety 24 hours a day, 365 days out of the year.
Make sure that all the helpers in this area are very aware of what the
safety issues are. One victim had the Illuminati come directly into a
Christian safe house and take the victim out with them, without being
stopped. Fritz & I hope that we have stimulated you to
investigate
forming a support team for your general geographic area. We welcome
your comments and questions in this area.
Page 385 ...
TRAUMAS, FOUNDATIONAL TRAUMAS, How to master understanding what has
been done to your mind-controlled client
An Olympic athlete wants to learn every detail about his sport he or
she can. There is a fine line difference between success and failure,
and each understanding we gain brings us closer to the expertise we
want. There is a big difference between playing war or watching war on
television and being on the front line. There is a big difference
between hearing about the birthing process and giving birth to a child.
There is a big difference between reading about an eskimo and being
one. Numerous therapists have commented that they were totally
unprepared by their training for the depth of horrors that their
programmed DID (MPD) clients have experienced. How does one bridge the
gap? Most mothers will tell you that you can read all the books you
want on giving childbirth, but experiencing a childbirth as the mother
is the only real teacher. This book (and our two previous books) have
laid out the horrors of the programming for several reasons. One is to
help you get in touch with the victim you want to heal. While this book
can not transmit the full depth of the horrors of trauma-based total
mind-control, only a survivor of that trauma has the possibility of
knowing--and in most cases it was too horrible even - for them to
remember--this book (and particularly this section) can GIVE YOU THE
UNDERSTANDING to prevent clumsy therapeutic mistakes that stem from a
shallow understanding. One principle of success in life is to plan
ahead. If a carpenter were going to take out a wall in your house, he
would know how to use his tools, he would know what the wall was made
of, HE WOULD SHORE UP THE REST OF THE HOUSE so it didn’t all
crumble when he took out that wall. Time and time again, programmed
multiples find their therapists "experimenting" on them. In other
words, the person whose hands they have placed their life into,
doesn’t know the tools, what the situation is, nor how to
shore
up the other parts of the house before they do major destruction on
their programming structure. Many clients are irrevocably damaged. The
last two decades of therapeutic work with programmed multiples is
littered with the failures of "experiments". We shouldn’t
make
excuses for these failures, nor do we need to brood with guilt, life is
full of failures; we simply need to come out of denial about the high
percentage of failures, and make the corrections needed to succeed.
Generally, the victim, who has been victimized by the experimenting is
further victimized by being blamed for the experiment failing. So the
therapist had best plan ahead, and this section is written to help the
therapist do just that.
Two foundational pillars upon which the programming works is
dissociation and fear. In order for the traumas to work they need to be
as severe as possible. The worse the trauma, the better the
dissociative walls needed for programming. These traumas are so severe
that they splinter the mind, they are not ordinary traumas. Such
traumas are so severe that to describe them creates automatic denial
mechanisms within the listener. In fact, most victims prefer to live in
denial too, which is more comfortable. Going back to our carpenter
analogy, there are issues that the carpenter must know about and other
issues that aren’t important. For instance, "is the
insulation in
the section of wall being pulled out good or not?" is not an important
issue. Likewise, too much emphasis is put on whether the trauma
memories were real or staged, or put in with hypnosis. Unfortunately,
most of these disturbing memories are
Page 386 ...
probably actually took place. But whether they took place exactly as
remembered or not is not an important issue. The issue is that they
exist as reality for the victim, and they need to be dealt with. We are
dealing with the mind and its programming--that we can change, we can
not change what historically happened. We must identify what the mind
thinks and deal with that; and remind ourselves we are can not tamper
with the past no matter how it happened. If the therapist has a hard
time coming out of their denial, perhaps they are not suited for this
work. The therapist needs to work with the reality of the memory in the
mind--rather than trying to make a judgement call on what happened.
There is a place for making historical judgement calls, but it is not
the important issue in working with a victim. Those who have suffered
the traumas know that others can not understand them. Only by living
the birthing process does the mother fully know the experience. Only by
being on the front lines does the soldier know the horror and stench of
death. So the therapist is going to help the client work through
repressed memories. These memories are like BOILS OF THE MIND. They
rise from the subconscious to the conscious and then they are "lanced"
so-to-speak so they can heal. The root of that boil is FEAR. When the
trauma is embedded, it is covered over by love. This is intentional on
the part of the programmers. It creates the double binds that they are
so famous for. REJECTION OF THE PERSON feeds the boil, that is rooted
in FEAR and hidden by the DOUBLE-BIND OF THE PROGRAMMER’S
LOVE.
(If the reader feels unsure that he or she totally grasps this, no
problem, it will be clearly explained as the reader progresses through
this section.) The mind-controlled slave’s mind is like a
deep
vault holding information and
trauma memories. The victim’s soul carries intense deep
grieving,
and their body carries body memories of trauma. The deep vault of the
mind goes back to the traumas that took place before the child victim
was verbal. The fears and dissociation which provide the foundation for
the mind-control, were responses by the mind to PROTECT itself. Some
Christians are trying to cast out alters as demons, when the fracturing
and dissociation was a gift from God that allowed the victim not to
lose their mind when faced with overwhelming trauma. The little child
to protect itself from the threat and fear of death, the lies, the
double-binds, the guilt, the shame, and the confusion of drug states
guards its mind by building its structure of dissociation. When the
therapist sees a structured DID (MPD), he/she should equate that with
"intentionally done." At some point, the victim needs to see their
structuring as something INTENTIONALLY DONE. It was an intentional
crime against everything they were - an intentional crime upon their
entire being, body, soul and spirit. A little child is born pure and
clean. The betrayal of what that child was, is embedded deep in its
thinking. No child can withstand the full impact that comes from
realizing the extent of the betrayal of that child by humanity. After
years of protecting itself by dissociation, there is no way that a
programmed multiple can face the COMPLETE AND FULL IMPACT of a trauma
memory without resplintering the mind. Before the dissociative wall is
pull out, the therapist needs to place in methods to allow the victim
to bring up memories without the full impact. Journalling, art work,
mental television screens holding the memories at safe distances, etc.
are some of the bracing equipment that successful therapists put into
place to prevent the full impact of the memones. DEATH speaks to
everyone. No one is an island to himself (themselves) when it
Page 387 ...
comes to the subject of death. It is an undeniable fact of life, that
most people try to stay in at least partial denial of. The MYSTERY OF
DEATH reveals itself in many forms. The therapist needs to understand
that he/she is facing multiple kinds of death. A study of Trauma-based
mind-control could be renamed a study of Thanoteros. In fact, the man
reported to be the world’s present-day best programmer has a
degree in Thanoteros. After experiencing several types of death, many
victims of mind-control prefer death over the reality of life. Your job
as a therapist is almost that of a resurrection. You must give life,
where there is only death. This is why we believe that victims need
life-giving godly people in their recovery. The mind-control victim may
experience death in a grave. The victim may find it in a death, burial,
and resurrection programming ritual. It may be experienced in the cages
where the mind was split, it may be found in the isolation of a well or
closet. It may be found when a child is setup to watch another child or
pet that they identify with, and then be made to feel responsible for
its death. Death may be for the godlike programmer to die, or for the
programmer/master, to whom the victim is trauma-bonded, to turn his
back on the victim and walk out of the room. Death may be to find
oneself in a strange hospital room with white masked strangers and a
strange doctor hurting you. When the important people in a
child’s life reject its life as important--howls the child to
value itself. It is taught to value only that life that the master
gives. The therapist needs to show the victim the value of life, so the
victims will want to take back what was devalued by the programmers.
Death brings GRIEF. The survivor is dealing with different kinds of
death which are shrouded in mystery. The therapist is not dealing with
normal grief. The therapist will be dealing will overwhelming grief
when the memories are birthed. The programmer has worked to take the
child victim to a place beyond restitution. He has also built in a base
of fear with layers of fear, shame, guilt and grief. The therapist can
save herself and the client difficulties if the client isn’t
put
onto the defensive. Don’t attack what the client is saying
and
make the client’s parts defend what they are saying. This
will
only result in them avoiding the issue. Whether the therapist agrees or
disagrees, a judgmental attitude will insure that the deeper alters
will go into hiding. They will close up tight, and these alters will
take the path of least resistance and they will stay silent. Silence is
what their programming is demanding that they do. And the programming
will feel safer than challenging both the therapists skepticism and the
protective suicide/confusion programs that will trigger when they talk.
The programmers have programmed many alters to believe no one would
listen to them, and a skeptical therapist reinforces that programmed
conviction. If the therapist can begin to understand that the hours of
programming traumas ran into days, and the days ran into weeks, and the
weeks ran into months, and the months ran into years, they will begin
to get a sense of how the programming has been layered in. It took lots
of hours and money to put it in. Its going to take the client and
support team as long or longer to deal with the issues and to resolve
them. To hurry is not better. The therapist and the victim will have
repeated problems with denial. The therapist will have to accept and
work with the victim where they are at. Neither the victim nor the
therapist will want to believe that trauma-based mind-control has taken
place, but both need to accept where they are and where the therapy is
going. That’s the reality of life. The survivor of the
mind-control will run basically two tracks. During Illuminati
Page 388 ...
programming these are referred to as the right hand path and the left
hand path. The left hand path is the path of the satanic cult, and the
right hand path is the outside world, which has been portrayed in the
worst way by the programmers. The mind of a trauma-based
mind-controlled slave will naturally think about the thoughts that have
been repeatedly drilled into its mind, via all kinds of programming
methods and reinforcements. The mind-control is basically a type of
death--the human has died and a robot has replaced it. Humans were
designed to have meaning and purpose in life--not to follow orders
without purpose or direction. The programmers use fear of death to
motivate the slave, but fear is based on death, not life. Fear does not
give true life. However, the human spirit is almost impossible for the
programmers to kill. If the do break the human spirit, they risk
eventually losing the slave to apathetically losing interest in life.
The human spirit will fight to live and breathe. It will fight to
overcome what it doesn’t understand. It will fight to live
and to
have a life of meaning. It is important for the support team and
therapist not to underestimate the power of either of these two tracks.
The programming is extremely powerful. And surprisingly the human
spirit is extremely powerful. What results is an extremely intense,
overwhelming tug-of-war. The client’s actions will not
coincide
with a single plan. The client’s actions will lack harmony.
One
minute they may sabotage therapy, the next they may give a key to help
unlock the programming. (Because this author lived through being
programmed, and in turn learning to program others, I am in the unusual
place to understand the consequences of the various types of
programming situations that victims are subjected to. I hope to take
what Satan meant for evil, and use this knowledge for the benefit of
humanity. Please allow me to share some my insights.) An example of one
of the standard programming traumas will provide many lessons about the
nature of programming and deprogramming. By going over just this one
example, it is hoped that the mechanisms that drive the programming
will be exposed, and that the therapist will see how to curb the power
of the programming trauma. This programming trauma is based upon
Genesis 37 in the Bible. In this Bible chapter the patriarch Israel
loves his son Joseph best. He makes for him a coat of many colors (vs.
3), but this special act of love causes his brothers to become jealous.
His brothers then strip him of his coat of colors and throw him in a
well which had no water. The Illuminati like to carry out this standard
programming trauma when the victim is three years of age. They will
place a coat of many colors on the child, but this is to familiar the
child with programming colors. Their robe is not described as a robe of
pride, but a robe of shame, and the child is told "you’re
bad",
"look at what you did" and is rejected by a group of people and made to
feel alone and shamed. Once the child has been clearly rejected by the
group carrying out the programming, then it is lowered into a very deep
well. They are trying to build a foundation of guilt and fear for the
programming. The well is deep and either hot or cold. A lid is placed
over the well and the child is left in isolation after being shamed and
made to feel guilty. Occasionally the group may throw down body parts
and feces, urinate, and make noises from the top of the well to
continue the shame and rejection. For three days the child is left in
the well totally naked. The programmers want to make sure the child
feels no worth and rejected by mankind. It is important that the child
feels alone and stripped. That isolation from mankind, will help insure
the programming isn’t tampered with. It helps insure that the
child won’t
Page 389 ...
develop self-value. The well experience teaches the child FEAR and that
IT IS ALONE. The child feels the fear of being alone. It knows that it
is nothing except what the cult wants it to be. In fact, more
specifically, it knows it has no life nor value in life except what the
programmer wants it to have. It has been stripped emotionally and
physically. After tormenting the child for 3 days with no food and no
water and occasional verbal abuse, the child is in shock and at a
crisis point. The group raises the child up. At this point it is
critical to the programming, that ONLY the programmer/handler be the
person to bring the child out of the well and tend to its needs. The
programmer will give the child water to quench its thirst and food to
feed it. The programmer will pick up the infant and calm it. This
programming experience is to build upon the traumas in the womb and the
original fracturing (which is referred to as splitting the core)
trauma. In other words, if we were to number the sequence of traumas we
get, 1. womb traumas, 2. splitting the core trauma(s) 3. the well
trauma. The coat of many colors-well trauma is very severe. Many
children are lost during the trauma. Some children go inside and become
autistic. A medical team is present so that the child is kept alive
when it is brought to the surface. The child will be in what is called
a vegetable state when it is retrieved. After the programmer gets the
child to the surface and calmed, the child will be nurtured by its
mother or mothers-of-darkness. The child will be left alone after the
well trauma for 3 to 6 months. The child needs this time before it is
tampered with. After it has recuperated, the programming team will
begin working with the child. They will build a chronology of how it
felt during the entire sequence. This chronology will define for the
programming the sequence of dissociation, so that the programmers can
identify what types of pieces the mind has developed out of the
experience. Those different dissociative pieces each have different
characteristics, and those characteristics will be important to
determine what that dissociative piece will be used for. For instance,
if the child spends some time in fantasy that it’s parent
really
loves it even though the reality of the well experience contradicts
that fantasy--those parts of the mind can be used to build alters whose
love is based on fantasy. It is difficult if not practically impossible
to dissuade these alters that their love does not line up with reality
because the foundation is a trauma where this part of the mind survived
on fantasy. It is also important for the therapist to realize that
often the Illuminati (or other cult involved with the programming) will
separate out the parts of the mind from the splitting the core trauma
(remember this core trauma often includes a rape by Satan/& a
rejection by someone pretending to be God, i.e. a black mass), and make
sure the pure positive parts of the mind are put to sleep via drugs and
hypnosis before the well trauma. When the mind (the core) was split
part of the mind remained positive and in love with the Lord. That is
the part that is the most dissociated from the trauma. That part is
preserved and usually not subjected to the well trauma because they
want it to develop into the Christian front. It will experience only
the original shattering of the core trauma, and then in some cases be
left basically trauma-free. They realize that once this part is
indoctrinated into Christian doctrine it will be almost impossible for
it to ever deal with the mind-control. That is because Christian
doctrine from most mainline denominations will teach that part to
forgive and forget the past. That part of the mind--which will be used
to front the system will live in the pleasant atmosphere of
Churchianity--where nothing un-nice is allowed in. It will not want to
look
Page 390 ...
at what has happened to other parts of the mind-because its attitude is
forgive and forget and move on. Remember, this front part derived its
separateness from the rest of the system precisely because it was the
part of the mind that stayed in denial of the seriousness of the
trauma, and held onto its polyanish thinking in spite of the overall
reality of what happened. The mainline denominations will continue
layering in teachings that will make it difficult for this front part
to participate in freeing the rest of the mind from bondage. This is
why it is important for the churches first to realize what is going on
when trauma-based total mind-control is carried out, and second how to
divide the Word of God correctly so that people realize that the
Bible’s warning that a double-minded man is unstable in all
that
he does--needs to force the church to revise their teachings so that
their teachings apply to the reality that encompasses programmed
multiplicity and the healing of programmed-multiplicity. Now that the
three trauma periods have taken place (fetus, core split, and well
trauma) and a recuperating period of time has occurred, the programming
team can begin structuring. The structuring will involve
‘‘moving’’ parts around so that
they are
"positioned" to carry out their role in the grids and systems that are
to be built. This is similar to how files in a computer can be move
from directory to another without changing the file. When the
programming and structuring begins, the child will be questioned so
that the programmers know how the mind split during the trauma. The
programmer will then take the child’s parts deep into
hypnosis
and instruct them to forget the well experience. They are only to
remember the good part of the experience--the worthwhile lesson that
the programmer loved them. They are to forget everything except
"YOU’LL NEVER FORGET HOW MUCH YOU WERE LOVED". The final
split of
the mind that was in fear will be found and developed into a protector.
This part of the mind which lives in fear, will never allow the love
part to remember. The FEAR parts are left intact with their fear, they
will insure that the memory is dissociated. There is a point during the
well trauma when the child’s mind will fall asleep but
continue
splintering. When the child is sleeping the mind finds it difficult to
discern whether its thoughts are dreams or real. Have you ever had a
dream that was hard to separate from reality? The splintering during
this period produces dissociative parts which can be used for
gatekeeper alters. Gatekeeper alters are often the most deceived and
most programmed, and have difficulty knowing reality. This is because
they have been built from this dream state during the well-trauma.
Page 391 ...
If the therapist has a very strong logical front alter, that alter can
be used to provide a protection for the system. This alter can receive
hypnotic alarms that will make the system angry if anyone tries to use
codes on the system. This strong alter can also train his or her mind
to have enormous thick concrete walls behind them, so that the rest of
the system is blocked off from hearing anything through this alter. In
this way, a system can be protected from a verbal access code. However,
there are ways to get around such a defense. When alarm systems and
blocking walls have protected a system, the Illuminati will physically
abduct the victim, and take the victim to a nearby site where that
strong alter will be "destroyed"-shattered by electro-shock and
hypnosis and put out of commission. We suggest that if defensive
mechanisms are put in, don’t advertize this fact, because it
only
escalates the battle. The actual codes and triggers are generally
buried deep in the subconscious, and the support team is going to have
an extremely difficult time ever getting to any of these. We have tried
to greatly help people out by publishing what we can in this area.
Because the codes are buried so deep, it is really difficult to erase
them from the mind. The mind is trained to switch automatically upon
certain cues. Perhaps the most effective way to protect a victim of
mind-control is to have a knowledgeable support person with the victim,
24 hours a day. The co-authors have heard a number of therapists say
that having someone assisted 24 hours a day is impractical, and we
reply that trying to free someone (mentally & physically)
without
24 hour/day protection is impractical. There are prayer strategies and
powerful prayers that can be made to receive supernatural help to
overcome the triggers. There is certainly power in prayer, we have seen
this first hand. Over time some of the codes can lose their power
through desensitization. It always helps when alters are aware of what
the codes are so they can be alert to them. But the power of the codes
should not be underestimated, and to tell someone they are protected
from the codes by prayer, is similar to telling soldiers that bullets
can’t hurt them because they have been prayed for. While we
do
not discount the power of prayer, we also recognize that prayer needs
to be grounded in reality. If we pray for a house, we can imagine that
the house has magically appeared, but that is not faith, that is merely
self-deception. Some victims have been told incorrectly that codes will
not work with their system anymore because they were prayed for. Who
wouldn’t want to believe this, and yet we feel compelled to
warn
people that in the case of programmed multiples, there are seldom easy
answers. On the flip side, positive triggers can be put in, such as a
cue word that will call up a helpful front alter in case the system and
the therapist needs help. Sometimes this can simply be the
alter’s name.
Page 392 ...
As the alters of a victim of mind-control go through life, they will
inadvertently trigger programming and memories. Initially, there will
be fear around the activation of triggers. The novice therapist may
think the victim is setting off triggers just for attention. Actually,
that is not a major issue for therapists to worry about, even though on
the outside it may appear to be an issue. However, it is true that a
slave may be programmed to trigger their own programming as a
macro-program goes off to get the slave to do things to activate so
many triggers that the system self-destructs. It is no exaggeration to
say that life is one big trigger for victims of Illuminati
mind-control. The programmers have intentionally linked the external
environment of the slave to their programming in order to manipulate
the external world into becoming one more reinforcement for the
mind-control. The programming traumas have taken place over in so many
different geographic locations for most slaves, under so many different
circumstances and with so many different programming props that there
is not much left in life that doesn’t trigger emotions of
fear
and horror. After reading the Illustrated Guidebook, the Vol. 2 Formula
book and now our Deeper Insights book, readers should be aware of why
airplanes, animals, birthing issues, blood, caves, colors, crying by
children, death issues, fire, foods, heights, holidays, insects,
lightening, masks, occult paraphernalia, snakes, sounds, and harsh
weather such as tornados, and zoos will trigger a recovering victim of
mind-control. Phobias can be mentally linked to certain items, or may
simply be free floating. For the victim to get in touch with their
emotions is in itself very triggering. Any time the victim tries to
touch things at a personal or emotional level, they will trigger him or
her self. The harder the victim works, the more they trigger themselves
and the more fragile they become. In working toward freedom, pain
becomes gain. But the victim and the therapist are not going through
the pain for sadistic reasons, but because part of the power of the
mind-control is to separate pain the consequence of pain from the
sources of pain. Trauma memories are so abundant that abreactions lurk
in the background, ready to spring to life as the victim tries to go
through live. When the victim tries to shower, eat a meal, or have a
pet or visit with a little child, the alters may well abreact. The
traumas and abreactions do weigh down a person, but many recovering
victims, simply run two tracks, one for the world to see, and the other
which is full of pain and confusion. This happens too frequently in
therapy. It allows the therapist to fool him or her self that the
victim is doing much better than is actually the case. Sometimes an
alter can be put in charge of the body, while the rest of the alters
are busy trying to deal with all the pain and emotion that the trigger
has generated. Only by gaining the trust and knowing how programmed
DID’s think, can the therapist begin to get a more accurate
picture of how the slave has been triggered. Many therapists
mistakingly think that if their client who is a programmed multiple
will not experience victimization if they don’t refer to
themselves as "a victim". It is a fad to blame victims for their own
victimization. The thinking goes like this: Somehow the person set
himself up--&/or---it must have been bad karma. This is the pop
psychology of the ‘80’s and 90’s, that is
not
grounded in reality. The origins of this thinking are also suspicious.
This quack thinking reflects the human’s mind’s
need to
have things make sense. Many times life is senseless. Many
Page 393 ...
times people suffer senselessly. They do not set themselves up as
victims, and all the word games in the world aren’t going to
stop
what going on. To pretend that the multiples that are coming into
therapy are "survivors of abuse" is just one of many ways that the
therapists deny that they are not dealing with the real issue, the
client’s safety--which is not something in the past, but the
most
important issue in the present. Therapists have most victims
conditioned to call themselves "survivors". How many people on a ship
that continues to sink call themselves a survivor? The pitiful health
conditions that so many victims of ongoing mind-control have described
to the two co-authors, and their desperate cries to have this ongoing
abuse stopped make the word
‘‘survivor’’ a
mockery of their ongoing desperate attempts to hold onto some kind of
life. Every time the victim of mind-control accidently triggers a
trauma memory or programming they are being victimized by their past.
Of course, some therapists and ministers have managed to hide the MPD,
because they have mistakingly informed the victim that the MPD (DID) is
the problem. The DID is NOT the problem--but abreacting trauma memories
or trying to prevent a suicide program from actually taking place is a
major problem, and one that most survivors are going to have to deal
with by themselves, because the triggering will take place so quick and
frequently. The therapist needs to give the victim the mental and
external resources to at least cope with these challenges. The greater
the trauma, the greater the amnesia wall. When trauma memories break
through those walls into awareness, the distress to the victim can be
overwhelming. The victim will be frightened, ashamed, depressed,
fearful, suicidal, and have feelings that they are going crazy. No
patient is eager to discover that he/she has been violated by people
they loved and trusted. The false memory people are not portraying the
way the mind works to the public. The mind tries to protect itself, and
it is inclined to deny harsh memories, rather than latching onto trauma
memories because of some therapist’s suggestion of abuse.
Uncovering a victim’s history, does not depend on a single
memory. New memories are blended with old ones and new explanations for
what has happened reconsidered, until a verifiable more accurate
chronology begins to present itself. At the onset of therapy, if the
victim doesn’t know, the therapist can warn at the onset of
therapy that hand gestures, hypnotic patterns, lights and codes words
will trigger the subconscious mind of the victim. The field of what
might be called "aromic therapy" is still in its infancy, but has great
potential. The sensations of smells are closely linked with emotions in
the mind. If a therapist is trying to trigger a particular memory and
emotional content, smells associated with the memory will work better
than anything to pull up the emotional content. This is because of the
way smell is processed by the mind which first perceives it by the
smell setting off a combination of "detection codes" in the olfactory
bulb that are then relayed through the limbic system. The memories of
smells are very closely attached to emotional memories. This only makes
sense in a way, because smells are used by a newborn child to identify
its mother, they are used by lovers, and in other situations where the
sense of smell plays an important role in our emotions toward
something. The use of smells to trigger and to heal multiples is wide
open for exploration.
Page 394 ...
We believe that we may have some new slants on the Issue of trust which
might help both support teams and their client. In order for the
therapist and support persons to work with a programmed multiple system
they need to establish trust. This means that the programmed
multiple’s alter system not only feels the support person
will be
honest, but that they will protect the multiple physically and the
multiple’s confidentiality. It also means that the alters
trust
the abilities of the therapist to accomplish something positive. For
some front alters, they simply need to see that the therapist/support
person cares, is a kind person and has credentials or a history of
working in this area. For deeper alters, trust is a demanding and
complex substance that has to be won by lots of hard work, consistency,
respect, proficiency, and availability by the therapist. Many of the
deeper alters have never seen a person try to protect them before. Many
of the little hurting alters have never had any one to tell their pain
to. Many of the alters are convinced that no one can love them, that
they destroy everyone they touch, and that they can’t have a
good
relationship with any outsider. The therapist will have to prove these
attitudes wrong, even in the face of the client carrying out actions to
self-fulfill their expectations. This last paragraph was from the
therapist’s vantage point. On the other side of the healing
process is the programmed slave. Once the therapist opens up their
system, they will be processing memory 24 hours a day--even though the
front alters may not know it. Once therapy opens up a system all kinds
of things start coming unraveled. The host alter, who probably has been
thinking (and generally destroying all evidence to the contrary) that
she/he is a single person, now has become a complex system of competing
personalities. As the programming loses its power, more of the
multiplicity appears. (Family members are often devastated, because
they lose the person they knew for an entire tribe of personalities.)
As the system tries to move against the programming, every step that
would take a unit of mental energy for non-multiples is perhaps carried
out only with 1,000 times the mental energy. Instead of one person
changing his habits, you have an entire city or world that must be
changed, and they must change in the face of overwhelming resistance
from many others in the system as well as the programming and external
threats. While trust seems to be an easy thing for the therapist, trust
becomes one of the struggles that seems a no Many of the issues seem
like no-win issues. Remember that the child victim initially resisted
with all it had against being programmed, but at some point, the
programmers broke the child and its resistance completely. That
brokenness is a solid part of the child’s thinking. The
victim
will fall back into that broken "its-a-no-win thinking" very easily.
The programming leaves the victim’s mind operating in a
survival
mode. This means that much of the survivor’s thinking comes
straight Out of the first brain, the reptilian brain. The victim will
try very hard to see what the therapist is trying to say, but before
long, they find they have fallen back into the old way of thinking?
Why? Let’s say the therapist has worked on teaching the
kitten
alters that they are really not cats. Let’s also say the
therapist has worked hard on trust issues. Now all of a sudden the
judge alters and the programmers apply pressure to the kitten alters,
and before they realize it, they are seeing themselves as kittens and
distrusting the therapist. They are saying to the therapist,
"You’re telling me I’m
Page 395 ...
not a kitten, but I see myself as a kitten when I look in the mirror,
and beside I don’t want to be a human, because humans get
hurt."
What has happened? When the mind learns it builds K-lines. K-lines are
like highways that connect many different things in the mind. K-Lines
can connect cognitive demon processes, memory bits such as visual maps
stored as a memory. K-Lines are what create a mental state of
consciousness. A mental state is really nothing more than a K-line or
interconnected series of K-lines. When a highway (K-line) is built in
the mind, it is essentially permanent. It is similar to the Apian Way
that leads to Rome. The same road that allowed the Roman legion to move
its troops still is being used today. The same purported street that
Christ walked on in Jerusalem is still in existence today. In fact some
of the old stones from Roman times with the ancient Roman marks are
still in place. The road on top of the Great Wall of China still is
used in some places. However, if a road is not used, it can fall into
disrepair and its use will be abandoned. Likewise, the mind never
normally loses a K-line, they simply fall into disuse. By employing
Behavior Modification in the most extreme forms, alters are trained
during programming to develop particular K-lines. Those K-lines will
never be gone. Just like an alcoholic will always have an ability to go
back to being an alcoholic. What can be done, is to build new K-lines
that get more use. Since most deprogrammer are not willing to subject
their clients to the same behavior modification techniques (based on
survival & fear) that the programmers used, they must resort to
building new K-Lines in the higher brains. The programmer’s
K-lines remain dormant in the reptilian brain, the new behaviors that
are taught to the alters are attached to the higher brains. Now what
happens when an alter feels threatened? When their survival is at
stake, the reptilian brain shuts off the higher brains, and the mind
searches around for a K-Line that it can use. Lo and behold, the mind
finds the old K-line and reaccesses it. This is why safety of the slave
is so important to have a chance to develop strong new K-lines. When
the victim reverts back to their old thinking, the victim will think
that all has been lost, and that years of work have been lost. They may
tell the therapist that they no longer trust the therapist and that
years of work have gone down the drain. This is not so. The new
positive K-lines are in the mind still. They will always be there. They
simply need to be reaccessed and strengthened by use. When the survival
instinct is triggered -- "danger, danger" -- no reassuring and no
reasoning are going to break through, the mind under the control of the
first brain is shutting down the higher thinking processes and putting
its thinking energy into survival. Feelings are not facts, but the mind
will be resistent to information that is coming in from the higher
brains--unless it has been trained to let these higher thinking
processes override survival instincts. This will help people understand
why Jesus said that if you are not willing to mentally let go of the
need to survive (your reptilian brain) and give your thinking to God (a
higher conscious type thinking) you will not be able to have the
spiritual walk needed to see God. (If you try to save your life, you
will lose it. You must pick up your cross daily, that is sacrifice your
survival instincts daily, and allow God to work His will in your life.)
Christ also said that fear and trust are incompatible. He said that
perfect love for God will cast out fear. In other words, a fearful
person will have a hard time loving God. We must learn to conquer our
fears by strengthening the higher brains (what people call higher
levels of consciousness). The fifth brain processes concepts, works
with abstract thoughts, and can pull up
Page 396 ...
thoughts from various parts of the mind and do comparisons. The fifth
brain is a reflecting meditating type of brain. It is capable of
integrating many concepts together. In a sense it lives, it feeds off
of thoughts. Marijuana triggers this brain. Guided drug trips in
sensory deprivation tanks can be used to program this brain. The higher
brains can develop dominance over the lower brains to such a degree
that the survival instinct can be overridden completely, cases in
point, Jesus and his apostles allowed their own martyrdoms, the
Anabaptists under Menno Simon’s teachings on the Bible
peacefully
allowed their own deaths, and modern-day Christians under Bill
Gothard’s teachings in Uganda allowed themselves martyrdom
under
Idi Amin rather than fleeing. These were all deaths for a higher cause,
not deaths from mind-control. An alter who suicides the system is
acting under the confusion of behavior modification where it is acting
under the programming lie that it is protecting the system from greater
harm. This is simply a misguided survival instinct. What this means is
that safety and trust are inseparable issues. If front alters trust a
therapist who is not protecting their system from their mind-control
abusers, then it shows that the front alters are dissociated from the
ongoing abuse. The alters that are not dissociated from the ongoing
abuse are probably the ones that are helping hold up the therapy! - Why
don’t they trust the therapist? The front alters trust the
therapist? After reading this, the reader can see why the deeper ones
don’t have trust. If the system sees that there are higher
concepts at stake, that they have a role to play in helping other
victims, they may be able to override their fears with thoughts from
higher brains. Trust is in part going to be established by building up
the higher brains. This is why spiritual issues should not be neglected
in helping a victim. The first brain can also be worked with by working
with the body. The body memories of torture can be worked on to help
work out some of the body tension that helps stimulate the strong
survival danger signals. Massage and some types of rolfing or yoga
might contribute to re-orienting the first brain. The first
brain’s thinking sometimes show up in body symptoms.
Page 397 ...
TRUTH, discernment of
[For this section, we decided to let Fritz offer the reader some
helpful hints about seeking and finding the truth. Then we’ll
add
a few comments at the end. Fritz has a reason for approaching the
subject as he does, so try reading through it first before judging it.]
Everybody has their own methods for figuring truth out. Some are
finding it better than others. As with other things, there
isn’t
one set way for determining truth. The procedures are going to vary
from situation to situation, but there are certainly some useful tips
that can be passed on from one truth seeker to another. Finding truth
is not a matter of taste. One doesn’t investigate the
one-true
god by deciding what god suits our tastes best -- but lots of people do
this anyway. As we set our personal criteria for what is truth, we will
find others in disagreement with us. Ultimately, real truth is not
something personal but something all truth seekers can agree upon. This
is why Jesus Christ’s words are so powerful, they are
eternally
truthful. They are as much truth as they were when they were spoken.
Even though truth is not relative, but is an eternal objective truth,
God has given us free choice and a mind with which to choose what we
want to believe. Many have mistakingly considered one’s
religious
views as a matter of taste, not a matter of truth. That is perhaps the
first hurdle to correctly jump in the search for truth--Is this a
matter of personal taste or is it a matter of truth. What I eat for
breakfast is my choice, which of the foods is most beneficial for my
body is a complex issue of truth. Because the Watchtower Society
teaches that knowledge about God is an issue of truth not taste, the
JW’s believe that they can apply rational thought in their
search
for God. The Jehovah’s Witnesses have a book Reasoning From
the
Scriptures. The idea behind the title is a good one. There is a place
for reason and logic, but we must be careful to
place the Word of God as the foundation from which we reason.
Unfortunately, that is not what the Jehovah’s Witnesses do.
They
reason that the God in 3 persons is unreasonable, because there
can’t be both one God, and 3 Gods, so they reject the Triune
nature of God, even though the Scriptures are very clear that the
Father is God Almighty, Christ is God Almighty, and the Holy Spirit is
God Almighty. Three persons, one God. Sometimes we don’t have
enough understanding to reason from. The concept of three persons in
one supreme being seems outrageous at first, and yet that is exactly
what MPD (DID) is. That is one reason some people can not except
multiple personalities either. If we reason from our past
understandings, we may not be able to adequately explain new phenomena.
The parallels between MPD and what the Bible says about God are
enormous, once a person really gets a handle on how MPD really
functions within the mind. There are so many misconceptions about MPD,
and misconceptions about the "Trinity" (the word doesn’t
appear
in Scriptures), that this subject really needs a book in itself to
explain the parallels. But the bottom line is that we believe what God
has written to us, and then we reason from there. If God says He exists
in three persons, we accept that and then reason from there. We
don’t reason away what God Almighty says. This is where so
many
of us get ourselves into trouble. The Pharisees were able to make the
Word of God to have no effect, by thinking out things. Thinking
doesn’t always take us in the right direction even if it
makes
sense. This is probably why some people have rejected logic and
reasoning in their Christian walk. Logic is a function of a clear mind.
The Scriptures show godly men reasoning things out.
Page 398 ...
Being a reasonable person can be a good testimony for Christ. But we
must always humbly bear in mind that our minds only have a small part
of the facts and understanding about the universe and life that exists.
If I understand one-billionth of what can be known about my situation,
I suppose I am fortunate. God understands so much more. If His Word
states something that seems unreasonable--I would rather trust His
Word, than my own feeble understanding. However, if I begin to have
thoughts that are contrary to the Word of God, and contrary to how I
normally think, then logic helps me realize that these are not my own
thoughts--they are the thoughts of demons. This is an example of how
reasoning from Scriptures can spare us from trouble. When we mentally
review how we have obtained certain thought patterns, if we acquaint
ourselves with how evil spirits influence a man’s thinking
via
our actions opening up portals and strongholds, then we can logically
separate out those thoughts that are from God and those thoughts that
are from Satan. Most fears are ungodly, and they come from
Satan’s kingdom. Hope and faith come from God. Discouragement
and
depression are not given to us from God, they are given to us from our
adversary Satan. There may be exceptions to this, but in most cases it
is clear that Satan’s kingdom is here to steal from us peace,
hope, love and faith, and is here to give us hate, fear, and
discouragement. We have to learn to be happy. We have to allow God to
bring us peace. Logically, if you want a happy life, you must go to the
Kingdom that wants to bring you peace, joy, love, and happiness. People
look for happiness in the strangest places! Logic-and reasoning will
tell you that Satan can’t bring you happiness. Logic can be
helpful to us in our Christian walk. Examples were given of how that is
true. We must be cautious in how we use logic. Logic is not to be used
to overturn the Word of God. None of us are brilliant enough to
challenge God’s Word. Logic & reasoning is how we
protect
what God has already taught us & placed into our hearts and
consciences. As we gather information, we can take best advantage of
that information if we separate the chaff from the wheat. Is the person
giving this information speaking in generalities, or is he speaking
about an exception to the rule, or is he speaking about a specific
case? When someone speaks about their private thoughts, how they love
someone, or have heartburn, their thoughts are private, we must accept
that we only can approximately understand exactly what they are feeling
and thinking. When we witness a car accident with another person, our
perspective of the accident is our own private perception of the
event--BUT other people can also witness the event. The car accident is
NOT a subjective event, even though there is some subjectivity in
people’s perception of it. The accident is not an idea it is
an
objective event. Modern philosophy has a hard time accepting this, even
though it makes common sense. The events of that objective reality can
be distorted or misreported and not reported in many different ways.
However, the accident is an objective real event. More than one person
can experience that reality. If we dream about an accident, then that
is a concept. Concepts and what our judgement calls about what our
senses have reported are two different things. We normally
don’t
doubt what we apprehend. We normally do question the existence of what
we mentally create (our ideas); that is until we come to someone who
has been programmed and taught via behavior modification not to trust
their own senses. The programmed slave loses the ability to discern
what is a concept, merely an idea the brain has imagined, and what is
actually something that has an external reality and has been
apprehended. Hallucinations will mask themselves as perceptions, when
they are not perceptions at all. Further, they are very
Page 399 ...
suggestible. They have shut down their critical thinking and have an
unconscious agreement with the programmer that whatever he says is
truth. The movie/book 1984 which was written many years ago describes a
time when society as a whole was under the mind-control of Big Brother.
When the main character steps out of line, he is reprogrammed, by
torture. The goal of the programming was to get this thought-offender
to accept whatever truth the programmer wanted from him. The programmer
wanted him to get to the point that when the programmer held up 4
fingers, the man didn’t know what he saw, but if the
programmer
said that the 4 fingers were 5, then the victim would actually see 5.
This is exactly where the programmers get their victims, and is part of
the reason they no longer can trust their own senses. Can several
people have a simultaneous hallucination? Yes, and during the
programming and during the life of the mind-controlled victim,
hallucinations that are experienced by several people are a fake
perception that is even more difficult to reject because our normal
basis for deciding if something is an external reality that is being
apprehended, versus our own imagination, is that other people can also
see (or experience) it. When several other people experience something,
that is a common test that the event happened in reality. (This is the
concept of having several witnesses.) However, witnesses can be
mistaken. The victim of mind-control must be given more than a Bible
--"Here, take this, this is the truth." The victim of mind-control must
take back what was stripped of them. They must learn to have that
critical facility that has been stripped from them--the ability to ask
is this an external reality that everyone can experience, or is this a
perception, or a grand illusion that several people are only thinking.
Today, it is a fad to say everything is subjective. It is not. There is
a reality. Our memories may or may not correspond to something that did
exist. Memories can be perceptions and imaginations also, that mask
themselves as experiences just like our hallucinations can. We can be
skeptical about whether we have a concept in our mind that corresponds
to what others could experience, or whether it is an imagination. But
we can not accurately be skeptical of the existence of reality and
truth. Since total skepticism of the existence of reality is
self-defeating, the occultists have charged off in the other extreme,
an equally wrong direction, and declared that if the mind has an idea,
the idea must be attached to some reality, even if that reality is
actually another magical sphere somewhere. This turns all fictions,
visualizations, dreams, imaginations into some mystical perception of
some supposed alternate reality. The truth is that these "magical
realms" are shared hallucinations. No matter how many people have the
same hallucination, that does not make that hallucination become a
representation of some external reality. Reality is the world we live
in together. The programmed multiple lives in their own private worlds.
The therapist may have to enter that private world and bring the person
back to the external world that humanity lives in together. If there is
anything that highlights the differences between the external world of
reality and the internal world of hallucination it is programmed
multiplicity. Because the differences are obvious for the slave, there
is no reason why they can’t return to the world of reality.
The
problem that lies for some non-multiples (especially some psychotics,
but for many people in general) is that they can’t see the
two
tracks, they can’t see the two worlds. I have seen Americans
watching soap operas, sitcoms, and other shows, and then tell me that
the shows are real events, and no argument would dissuade them. In
fact, the philosophers Locke and Descartes both shared the same
problem, even as philosophers they could not see the difference between
external reality that is apprehended by our senses, and our own
Page 400 ...
head-trips. As our senses gather in their sensory input, our minds go
into gear to compare what they are sensing to what the mind has
cataloged already. In other words, the mind is trying to make sense of
what it is receiving. This is why we can "talk over someone’s
head" or why I say that the common American has no frame of reference
(& no world-view) to hang my information on. If we are unable
to
compare what we are sensing to anything else, it is unintellible to us.
So learning is a building process, of comparing and building bridges
from one item to the next. Our minds are masters at seeing
relationships, but it still has to be a building process--whether the
process is quick or slow. Some people want to jump over necessary steps
of the building process, and read advanced level material before they
are ready for it. That is one reason this book should only be read
after a certain level of understanding is achieved. Detecting what is
going on in the environment around a person is only part of what the
human mind can do. It can also anticipate, plan, think, imagine,
calculate, etc. The senses play only a limited role in our thinking.
Sometimes we need to use common sense and realize a thought is merely a
thought, and nothing else. Just because the thought develops in our
mind, doesn’t mean there is any external reality to it.
Feelings
are not facts. Recovering victims of mind-control should remind
themselves of this one frequently, feelings are not facts. On the flip
side, there are certain phenomena is life which demand explanations,
such as how did an extremely well-designed incredibly complex system of
life as well as an incredible planet come into being? This is a
fundamental question of reality. Although the answer "There was an
Almighty Creator" calls for us to employ our imagination to visualize
what we can’t see, that doesn’t subtract from God
being an
external reality. Something is not negated in its existence just
because we can imagine it, or haven’t experienced it yet.
Jesus
in a sense argued for the existence of the Holy Spirit, by saying it
was something not seen and yet it was something experienced and
something that created tangible results like the wind blowing through
the trees. He was essentially saying, yes, the Holy Spirit (Holy Ghost)
is real. Aleister Crowley, a self-made satanist who revealed much more
about the occult world than the Illuminati families would have done,
based his Thalamic law, "Do what thou wilt, is the whole of the law"
upon the underlying idea that pleasure is good. Common sense will teach
people that pleasure and good are not equal. This philosophy is
hedonism, and leads to self-destruction, which is what
Crowley’s
philosophy did to himself and others around him. Where this philosophy
goes astray, is that Wisdom is good, but may not be obtained through
simply pleasure. We may be pleased when we obtain Wisdom, but that
pleasure in obtaining wisdom IS NOT wisdom itself but a by-product of
having obtained a desired need. While thinking himself wise with all
his satanic hedonistic cabalistic drug-sex magic, Crowley was going
down a dead end. This is so obvious, that some modern thinkers try to
revise the concept that pleasure is good, to the underlying idea that
what is desirable for a man is good. But again this makes a mess out of
things. People differ in their desires and this means what is evil for
a victim of mind-control is good for the abuser. Betrand Russell
connected to the Illuminati stated, "Ethics is the art of recommending
to others what they must do to get along with ourselves." This fits
with the basic viewpoint of many people today who think that there are
no moral truths, everything is relative and subjective, just an
opinion. If we approach the subject from an understanding that the way
we as human beings are constructed by God, our very human nature has
created needs within us. If we make a moral judgement it is not
relative but it is grounded in the truth that we have a real need, and
these
Page 401 ...
morals express a desire for the good that satisfying that need brings.
For instance, a glass of water in the desert is a need, it is good. A
glass of whiskey at the bar is a want, it appears good--but it is not a
genuine need of the body. We ought to desire more of the things we
need, but we often sacrifice these for our wants. Common sense teaches
us a foundational moral law that we should desire what is really good
for us. Good being defined as what mankind needs. If we know we that
truly need something, then we know what is good, and we should desire
having it. What sustains the universe? If we realize that God sustains
the universe, then God is realized as a need, not a want. This explains
why mankind is so busy with worship. Monkeys do not worship. Fish do
not worship. But man tries to worship. Neither fish nor monkeys feel
guilt because they do not sin. But man does, because man was given the
free will to do what was right. What I am doing is laying the
groundwork to show the reader that all these modern philosophies that
say there are no absolute rights or wrongs, are not grounded in truth
& reality. We as humans have needs, and to desire those real
needs
be met is good. Since the fall of man, which was the rise of religion,
a great deal of muddying the waters has occurred. The fall of man
paralleled the previous fall of Lucifer. The trauma-based mind-control
is a mirror image of the fallen mind of Lucifer. At this point, - some
of you readers will consider this to be wild preaching--because it is
very unpopular to view the mind-control as something religious in
nature. Because Luciferian gnosticism & Satanism are religions,
it’s popular to ignore the religious side of the programming.
To
associate the occult with trauma-based mind-control seems to some
secular therapists unnecessary. They want to sidestep the religious
nature of the programming with the mistaken idea that they can
sterilize what happens to the victim in strictly scientific terms. But
if we don’t dismiss the existence of good & evil, God
&
Lucifer, and we understand the mind of Lucifer/Satan, then we amazingly
"just happen" to have the greatest explanation for understanding the
trauma-based mind-control. [Now Cisco will pick up from here.] Lucifer
wanted to steal God’s identity. Lucifer in his fall was
stripped
of his birthright, his identity and his rank, and was separated from
truth. Lucifer goes forth to steal the identity & birthright of
children, and to separate them from truth. This is just a small part of
how the mind-control is a reflection of the mind of Satan. An entire
book could be written on this subject alone. No matter how painful it
is for a mind-control victim to realize what Satan stole from them,
once they have acknowledged that, and begin to take back what God
originally gave them, then the wisdom God will give, will bring
knowledge. And that knowledge will bring understanding. And with that
understanding the eternal life force (spirit) that the Creator gives
each person can look into the deepest pit of hell and it will still see
the light of that truth. And Lucifer knows that when you put light on
darkness, there is a light at the end of the tunnel which will continue
to break down the darkness. The day one seeks truth with his whole
heart, is the day he will find it. That light will be a light on the
hill that will prevail over darkness. You can be sure that if you are
dealing with mind-control structuring, you are dealing with Satan the
father of all lies. When the victim can acknowledge the crimes that
were done against him or her self, then he is able to acknowledge what
Satan is, the Father of all lies. If evil is recognized as evil, then
seek the goodness of truth. The truth will open a doorway into the mind
that brings growth, maturity, stability, assurance, a new awakening,
and other exciting things. The battle for your mind is between truth
and evil.
Page 402 ...
ABREACTIONS, avoidence of
OVERVIEW. The original programming traumas are perpetrated by the
programming cult because these traumas are dependably severe enough to
cause the mind to split. Later traumas are the result of ongoing abuse
by the slave’s users. They may cause splits because the
multiple
has developed splitting as a natural mental reflex to difficult
situations.
The original programming traumas are so severe that if the slave
remembers them, the memories of these traumas are enough to splinter
the mind again. Traumas that result from ongoing perpetrator use of the
slave may not be so traumatic, but they will also bring with them
painful body memories, confusion, and the potential to splinter the
mind.
Until recently, the major thrust of the therapeutic community has been
to try to push the victim towards abreacting the trauma, which is
actually causing more psychological stress and harm than good to the
victim’s mind.
The correct Goal & some Basic Techniques.
Memory work needs to be done with the goal of preventing abreactions.
Memories can be looked at by journaling, being placed on internal movie
screens (or VCR players), by artwork and a number of other techniques.
Of course the programmers are now a step ahead of therapists and are
placing in programs to prevent these non-abreactive memory techniques.
We will review some of the techniques for dealing with - abreactions.
They basically follow common sense. When a person has a memory:
· they can be distracted to pull away from it,
· they can intentionally encase the memory in some box,
vault, safe, room or other storage unit,
· or they can develop ways to slow down and tone down the
affect
of the memory so that the mind is cushioned from the severity of the
memory.
As an alter struggles with memories, another alter can be intentionally
shifted to hold the body. Some therapists will also develop a temporary
safe room where an alter can retreat from memory work for a temporary
respite. It is going to be nearly impossible for the victim not to
suffer from their memories, in fact, every victim we know has suffered
incalculable torment from their memories. The slogan "no pain, no gain"
seems to have been written for their situation in life.
Page 403 ...
ABREACTIONS, understanding
MEMORY FLASHBACKS. A review of history will show that victims of
torture/trauma can potentially get memory flashbacks for the rest of
their life. These memory flashbacks can be triggered in a number of
ways, and the memories may lay dormant and hidden for any length of
time. The disadvantage of having memories is that they often bring
fear, body pain, and loss of sleep. They are like nightmares--although
technically memories are different than nightmares in that they are
more closely rooted to an actual torture/trauma. The person
experiencing these flashbacks typically thinks they are going crazy. It
is important for you to realize that millions of people who have been
tortured have also thought they were going crazy, but that what was
really happening is that they were having just like you a normal
reaction to some very frightening events. To get flashbacks means that
the mind is again trying to overcome a bad experience. Flashbacks are
not a reason to panic---they are normal---and if a person can remind
him/herself to stay calm as possible, one will get through them better.
It may be difficult to stay calm during a difficult memory. But staying
calm is one of the goals which can be worked toward and achieved. One
reason that flashback occur during sleep is that the mind’s
defenses are weaker during sleep so the resistance to the memory coming
is reduced. There are a number of positive things that can be done in
response to memory flashbacks. Although the memory flashbacks on the
surface appear to be negative experiences--there also can be some
positive benefits. If the memories are correctly handled they can break
down the dissociation. The memories can be used to protect the person
from future danger. What I suggest as a plan of action is that you
accomplish several goals:
1. reduced and eliminate the feeling of passive helplessness that comes
from not being able to control memory. I will suggest ways to control
memory.
2. take measures during the memory to restore your contact with present
reality.
3. continue to breakdown dissociation.
There are a list of things a person can try when flashbacks occur. Some
will work and others won’t. One may try these in the order
listed:
a. Try to think of something that is opposite of what the memory is
about or something that is incompatible with the event. If the event is
centered around hate, think of an event that is centered in love.
b. Next, one might try to think of the negative consequences of going
through the memory. This might encourage action to sidestep it.
c. Try an activity that will distract the mind.
d. Find out what triggered the memory flashback and then try to remove
the flashback via the memory-on-a-movie-screen method or the
memory-locked-in-a-safe-box method.
e. If nothing else try pushing it back from the mind--see if clenching
your teeth and pushing your tongue hard against your palate will help.
To gain control of the flashback when it occurs here are some
suggestions:
a. Learn and know of what situations cause certain flashbacks. This
will give you a greater sense of control and lessen the panic that
comes from certain flashbacks. Gaining control over flashbacks can seem
like one step forward and one step back but eventually control is
gained--sometimes without the person realizing the progress they have
made.
b. When in a memory--first move a finger then bit by bit the rest of
the body. Then start controlling your breathing (this can all be
practiced anytime). Then get up and look out the window to prove to
yourself that you are at home and not in the memory. Then write down
the memory. This will help in several ways including the dissociation.
If it gets difficult to write the memory--then interrupt yourself with
Page 404 ...
quiet deep breathing. After writing down the memory--don’t
reread--but go get something to drink which will be calming such as a
cup of coffee. If the relaxation is practiced and can be achieved in
response to bad memories it will give you a sense of control over the
memories. c. The victim can talk with their support person about what
the trauma was and what it meant to you at the time it happened. This
will allow you to achieve an assimilation of the experience into
yourself. If you can discuss the event in full and the personal meaning
you have a greater chance of conquering and controlling the flashback.
It has been reported that memories that are too difficult for people to
talk out because they have contradictory feelings, embarrassment etc.
regarding them, will repeat themselves and the mind will often become
obsessed with those difficult flashbacks. Talking them out can be
healing. Why deal with memory flashbacks? One reason is that flashbacks
intrude into the present and mean that you are pulled away from
enjoying the present reality into reliving something in the past.
Relief from flashbacks will help you, the healing victim, to
concentrate better, get more pleasure out of being with others, and
make life more enjoyable. Bear in mind also, that everyone who has been
tortured goes through periods in time when they disconnect from others.
This has been called different names such as "emotional anesthesia" and
"psychic numbing" so don’t be hard on yourself if you
temporarily
lose the ability to feel close to others. The torture was aimed at
breaking the victim’s personality. Accepting that that was a
goal
of the perpetrators of the mind-control programming is a step in
restoring the identity that could have been there. This leads to the
next area of concern: the dehumanization.
DEHUMANIZATION. Because devaluation of another person makes it easier
to torture them, devaluation normally occurs in the minds of torturers.
They dehumanized not only to control you--but to build up their own
image enough to partially justify torturing you. They most likely were
also devalued and dehumanized in their own lives and passed on that
devaluation. Realizing the reasons why dehumanization was carried out
may help a person overcome the process. Another help is to set yourself
up in situations where you have positive experiences using your talents
and skills will help you overcome the negatives of dehumanization.
Page 405
p_page405.jpg
Child’s subconscious mind protects itself:
· goes into denial
· learns a. not to trust anyone incl. self, b. since trust
is
the basis of communication they also learn not to be in touch with the
world.
VISIBLE CLUES:
· emotional distance
· collecting spirit
· clingy behavior or independent behavior
· learning difficulties
INTERNAL CLUES:
· lack of emotions
· denial of abuse
Page 406 ...
p_page406.jpg
Child’s subconscious mind protects itself:
· to guard itself it creates free floating fears
· to further guard itself withdraws from people or acts
aggressive toward others
· splits off a part to take the trauma
· tries to remedy by reaction in the other direction, i.e.
becomes an obsessive caretaker of others
· learns a. help & support do not exist, b. that
there is no power against the programmers.
VISIBLE CLUES IN VICTIM:
· eating, sleeping and bedwetting disorders
· nightmares
· phobias
· withdrawal or aggressiveness from others
· obsessive caretaking
INTERNAL CLUES
· DID (MPD)
· Suicidal thoughts
Page 407 ...
p_page407.jpg
Child’s subconscious mind protects itself:
· preserves a sense of the world—I must be bad. It
was my fault.
· preserves self-respect—Since I didn’t
resist, I am at fault.
· preserves good image of abuser—I can continue to
love him, because I was at fault.
· preserves happiness—What a thrill to be abused,
I must have wanted this for being so bad.
· learns to have a. a comfort zone of self-blame, b. to
become a
caretaker which sets the victim up for more self-blame when things go
wrong, c. fantasize to stop the pain.
VISIBLE CLUES IN THE VICTIM:
· wants to punish one self
· sabotages self achievements & acts of love by
others
· isolates
INTERNAL CLUES IN VICTIM:
· guilt, shame, & a "bad" self-image
Page 408 ...
p_page408.jpg
Child’s subconscious mind protects itself:
· mind accepts the violations
· concludes that all touching is a sexual come-on
· learns a. confused & inappropriate behavior and
values, b. perceives its value from being a sexual object
VISIBLE CLUES IN VICTIM:
· far too-early sexual development
· strong negative or positive feelings/reactions to sexual
issues
· confusion about sexual norms
INTERNAL
· lots of sexual issues
Page 409
p_page409.jpg
Child’s subconscious mind protects itself:
·decides not to tell about the trauma, becomes secretive
· believes it has a guilt to punish
· either it decides to quit risking failure by reaching for
success OR over tries to succeed but never feels successful.
VISIBLE CLUES:
· secretive
· self-destructive behavior
INTERNAL CLUES
· feelings of guilt, shame, self-hate, and isolation
Page 410 ...
p_page410.jpg
Child’s subconscious mind protects itself:
· creates amnesia walls & splits the mind into
dissociative parts
· the mind disowns the body
· learns to a. dissociate as a defensive habit & b.
to copy others in cult as role models.
VISIBLE CLUES:
· no sense of danger
· dissociative behavior
· phobias
· eye-rolls
· sleeping disorders
· inconsistent behaviors
· lost time
· denies acts that others have witnessed
· moody
· uses pronoun "we"
INTERNAL CLUES:
· helpless feelings
· no confidence
· DID (MPD)
· depersonalization
· emotions locked up
Page 411 ...
ABUSERS, confrontations or not
Several victims of mind-control have said that they felt the best
pay-back that they could give their abusers was to get well. This is
probably right. There wouldn’t be any punishment that would
do
justice to the crimes that have been committed. We victims should try
and fight evil with something positive, something good. But what about
confronting an abuser, and letting the perpetrator’s system
know
the suffering they’ve caused, etc. Just because the victim
has
worked through some issues, doesn’t mean the abuser has. The
abuser had to sear his mind years ago. What abusers do, is that first
they sear their consciences and then they develop justifications in
their mind for what they do. They are deeply entrapped in their own
rationalizations. The Network has prepared them excellent
alibi’s
to "prove" they could not have done it. Talking to an abuser about your
mind-control issues is like talking to a cement wall. All it will do is
get the therapist and the victim into more problems. In some cases, the
False Memory Syndrome has helped the abuser and the therapist ends up
getting taken out of commission. Keep the therapy work private. Go
toward health quietly. The world is not even ready to understand the
healing of the victim. And the abuser is even less ready to be
understanding. The abusers simply feel threatened. Some victims have a
deep drive to make their abusers understand. They are struggling with
the effects of the mind-control, and have not yet realized that the
abusers are NOT their friend, but another multiple who is also deeply
trapped in what they are doing.
Page 412 ...
ALTERS, how to work with deep Illuminati alters (issues for therapists)
Up to now, therapists have chosen therapeutic modalities that resulted
in avoiding dealing with the deep Illum. alters. One of the most
acclaimed centers for helping programmed multiples only works on issues
that presenting alters have, and uses electro-shock techniques to try
to wipe out deeper issues in the mind. Other prominent psychiatrists
who have travelled & trained other therapists how to deal with
MPD/DID have incorrectly taught that right brain-left brain issues are
simply a program. Therapists have by & large ignored Illuminati
religious beliefs, which has insured that deeper alters are not going
to present themselves to be ridiculed. Others have attempted to cast
the deeper alters out, which in reality buries them deeper into the
subconscious, where they carry out their influence at an even
harder-to-find level. In fact, when this is being written in 1996, most
therapists still remain ignorant of or in denial that the Illuminati
exists. Our system has unsuccessfully looked far & wide for a
professional who understands the deeper Illuminati alters. We believe
this material will make a fresh and valuable contribution in the work
needed to free Illuminati slaves. Therapists are in a difficult
position to work on Ipsissimus/Grand Master alters or Grand Dame or
Mother-of-darkness levels, because, before they can learn how to work
with deeper parts, they must forget many things they have been
incorrectly taught. Therapists need to see the interrelationships
between Illuminati cosmology & beliefs and the programming that
is
carried out. Witchcraft rituals of the Illuminati are a form of deep
level programming. This is why it is ludicrous
for Wiccan counselling centers to help mind-controlled slaves,
&
yet there are a number of licensed wiccan centers
counseling’’ multiples with programming. The very
teachings
of witchcraft are intertwined with the programming that needs to be
disassembled. Several elements that are common to all forms of
witchcraft are: a. the stimulation of an awareness of a hidden side of
"reality", b. the awakening and training of hidden powers of the mind,
c. the intense training and discipline of the various levels of the
subconscious mind. For instance, psychic abilities and astral
projection are basic components to witchcraft. Witchcraft at the higher
Illuminati levels is the skill to work in the subconscious mind
&
change consciousness at will. Witchcraft, especially the cabalistic and
hermetic-based witchcraft of the Illuminati, understood how to work
with the subconscious mind long before modern psychology existed.
Modern psychology is actually based upon cabalistic doctrines. There is
a one-to-one correspondence between Freud’s theories and
Jung’s theories and the older witchcraft philosophies. The
child,
adult, parent of transactional analysis is simply the maiden, mother,
crone triple goddess of the Illuminati. And these three parts of the
mind have been well understood and manipulated in rituals for
centuries. 2 important steps to take in order to help deeper parts are:
a. realize that the deeper parts are centered in a trance state in
their internal world, and are developed not to function in the
conscious world, but are highly skilled to function in the subconscious
mind, b. dream state therapy should be developed to help the deeper
parts unravel their programming.
Page 413 ...
CLONES
When the core is split, the dissociated parts that split when the child
was in a rage are used to make clones. These little child parts are
very small, and have not had a chance to grow up. The creation of
clones is described in Vol 2. After they are discovered by the
programmer he uses hypnotic magic to drop a robot suit over the child
alter. The suits are made of different types of metal and there are a
number of different types of suits. Often the children turned robots
are given serial no.s. They may perceive themselves as military units.
Clone splits are formed into armies that come to the front of the mind
to protect the programming. They are like a nursery of screaming
children. It is impossible for the front host alters to calm these
clones down. What has been found to work on the clones from the
40’s through the 60’s programming is to put water
on them.
Water paralyzes them. Then one can go around to the back and find wires
or switches on their suits. A switch may shut them off. Or perhaps the
wires can be tampered with. When these little children are looked at,
these parts still have probes and needles in them. These child alters
need to go to an internal hospital, where they can mentally go through
some care to get them relieved from the state they perceive themselves
in. After they are out of their suits, the robot suits can be vaporized.
JUDGE ALTERS
Judge alters are alters who enforce the laws of the system, which of
course are the guidelines & programming established by the
programmer. In witchcraft paradoxes are used. Each split of the mind is
valued. The alters, such as the judges, are mirroring their abuse. Fear
is the basis of their obedience. They have seen the worst terrors. They
have seen things others haven’t seen. They are structured
along
the lines of demonology, and they believe that they must answer to
Lucifer. They have no doubt that they are going to hell. They believe
the better they obey, the better life they will have in hell. Their
obedience in keeping the rest of the system in line with the
programming is their desire for a better life in hell, which they
already have a foretaste of. Much of their programming was put in
during the sensory deprivation, so they don’t fully
comprehend
why they do what they do, they just believe that what they are doing is
for their survival. Many of the deeper alters are functioning with a
survival of the fittest attitude, where only the strong and obedient
survive. They have been given the Spirit of War & they war for
the
system. They carry the full force of demonic possession. The starting
point for many of these deeper alters is to realize they were
programmed to their script. MIRROR IMAGES.The script for the mirror
images came from God floating over the water in the Bible’s
Genesis. Mirrors of an alter are simply fragments of some alter. They
are taught they are separate, but the separation is an illusion. There
are several programming tricks they do with the child such as "This is
your hand" trick, to confuse the child’s mind about the
mirror
image. The splits are done in front of mirrors. "ITS THE MIRROR IMAGE
ThAT IS GETTING HURT, AND HAS BLOOD ALL OVER IT, NOT YOU." After the
child accepts the mirror image as real, they put it into hiding with
hypnotic suggestions, & they tell the child the mirror image
split
doesn’t exist. The mirror image will take the programming
traumas
& the anger.
Page 414 ...
HOW TO WORK WITH DEEPER ILLUMINATI PARTS (deeper issues for therapists)
The following are things for therapists:
STUDY:
· a. how liluminati beliefs intertwine with programming
· b. how the external Illuminati is structured
· c. how to do dream therapy and to be sensitive to dreams
BE AWARE OF:
· a. the Illuminati reinstates (reprograms) sealing programs
over the dream state approx. every 3 years to stop revealing dreams
from surfacing.
· b. how Helping Alter can work deep in the subconscious to
pull
memories and to interact in a positive way with deeper parts
· c. how programming hits at a subconcscious level. It may
seem
benign to the conscious mind, and yet be building up subconscious
momentum and growing power.
· d. how complex it is for deeper alters to separate
objective & subjective realities.
TREAT WITH RESPECT
· a. the training in programming that the deeper hierarchy
alters have
· b. that the deeper alters will respond in a manner that
reflects their position, staus and training.
Page 415 ...
BACKACHES, suggestions for body aches
Body aches, especially backaches, can keep the mind so preoccupied with
pain that the rest of the mind doesn’t work on other issues.
The
body, mind, and spirit all need healing. When building an alter system,
the Illuminati programmers build in protective programming by using
spinal surgical techniques. This kind of programming is usually done in
a hospital. It is done by specialists who know the spine and the
nerves. There are several variations of what is done. They will attach
this spinal pain to a hypnotic trigger that if you remember such and
such, you will relive the intense spinal pain. The variations on this,
are to paralyze someone from the waist down, or a leg, or an arm. Using
surgical drugs and procedures, they can even make a person "blind" by
hitting certain nerves and this can be used to create blind alters, or
blinding programs. Simple electroshock to parts of the back can be
painful. The Illuminati also lay in the spirit Leviathan which lays on
the spinal column and causes intense pain if the victim goes toward
health. A number of Illuminati victims have gotten relief from intense
back pain by deliverance from Leviathan. What this means is that a
support team that is working on issues may want to have a good
chiropractor on the team, and maybe a masseuse. Working the muscles of
the body will free up trauma pains, and alters that get locked up
throughout the entire body. Needles that are still mentally in the body
are also locked up in body pain too. If a victim hits programming that
flips them into pain, the alters will of course be preoccupied with the
pain in the body and they will lose sight of the memory. Go directly to
the pain and work on the pain issues, because the memory is sheltered
in the pain.
Page 416 ...
The following inventory can be worked on by a victim of mind-control as
home work or the therapist can use the questions as a means to build
rapport and understand the client better. In order to save printing
costs this section will not provide room to write the answers down.
Sheets of paper or a tape recorder are needed to record answers.
Questions are numbered for easy reference. This inventory is for the
therapeutic process--which means ultimately it is for the victim. The
questions are meant to be a guide, feel free to speak about anything
that pertains to each biographical time period. If something important
happened that you want to report, you don’t need a question
to
talk or write about it.
EVERY ONE HAS ROOTS. The following questions are about the
client’s roots. Roots are important, we need to know where
we’ve come from to know where we’re headed.
Understanding
the client’s family may reveal a great deal about the client.
Learning one’s roots can reveal important clues as to why
things
occurred in your life.
· 1. Tell the story about how your parents met and fell in
love?
· 2. Tell a story that would show what your mother was like.
· 3. What can you say about your mother, do you know where
she
came from, where she was born and what her life was like before she met
your father?
· 4. What are some of your mother’s emotional
traits, was
she warm and loving, or strict, or nagging, or unstable, or humorous,
how was she?
· 5. What was the best thing about your father?
· 6. What was the worst thing about your father?
· 7. What do you know about your father’s
bloodlines, his genealogy?
· 8. What do you know about your mother’s
bloodlines, her genealogy?
· 9. Was there anything unusual about your mother or father?
· 10. Did your mother ever give any sex education to you,
what was her attitude towards the subject in your view?
· 11. What was your father’s work?
· 12. What kind of bedtime stories did your father tell you?
· 13. Is there something important to say about your
grandparents or greatgrandparents?
· 14. In what ways were your uncles and aunts important to
you?
CHILDHOOD (pre-school) This section will be one of the most critical.
Don’t be embarrassed if you don’t remember, just be
open
& frank, because this inventory is for you. The therapist needs
to
watch for protectors to surface with the "approved solutions",
&
watch the different slants that are given by the client at different
times to the same subjects.
· 15. What is your earliest memory? How old were you? Where
did you live?
· 16. What do you know about your birth, were you
pre-mature, were you c-section, were you tiny or frail?
· 17. Did you have older siblings who helped raise you?
· 18. What was the neighborhood like that you grew up in
before kindergarten?
· 19. Did you ever get into trouble when you were between 3
and 5 years old?
Page 417 ...
· 20. Were you ever sent to your room, or made to stand in a
corner in your first few years?
· 21. How did your parents punish you?
· 22. Who disciplined you the most?
· 23. What kind of religious experiences did you have as a
small child?
· 24. Who was more religious, your father or your mother?
· 25. Who was your first grade teacher?
· 26. What was your first grade teacher like?
· 27. Can you describe your first day at school?
· 28. How would other people have described you when you
were a small child?
· 29. What kind of chores did you have as a child?
· 30. What kind of games did you play as a small child?
· 31. Do you think you had a happy childhood?
· 32. What are some of your favorite childhood memories?
· 33. What is your worst childhood memory?
· 34. How did you feel about going to doctors when you were
little?
· 35. What did you want to be when you grew up?
· 36. Do you remember putting your teeth under the pillow
for the tooth fairy?
· 37. Do you remember Christmas or some other holidays?
· 38. Did you know any crazy people when you were little?
· 39. What did you think about people who were a different
race when you were little?
· 40. What did you think about Halloween when you were
little?
· 41. Did you ever get sick when you were a little child?
· 42. Did your family go on any vacations, could you
describe one?
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL DAYS. If the client is talkative, let them provide as
much as they want. When dealing with victims of mind-control everything
about their life tends to be a clue as to what has gone on. The
therapist can trust their own curiosity and ask further questions. For
some victims, their host alter will not have memories below the age of
18, or their memories will be spotty. However, the newer mind-control
victims are getting better childhood cover memories laid in so that
their mind-control is not so obvious.
· 43. Do you remember the first book you read?
· 44. What kind of things did your parents like to read?
· 45. What kind of toys did you have in elementary school?
· 46. What were some of your favorite games during your
elementary school days?
· 47. Did you learn to play any musical instruments?
· 48. What were some of your favorite songs during that time
period?
· 49. Did your family move a lot, and how did that affect
you?
· 50. What was the worst experience that you can remember
from your school days?
· 51. What was the best experience that you can remember
from your school days?
· 52. Did someone in your class of the opposite sex have a
crush on you?
· 53. Can you remember what was the most memorable gift that
you gave as a child?
· 54. Can you remember what your favorite gift that you
received was?
· 55. Did your family take vacations during your school
years?
· 56. Did you have any strange people in your school or in
your neighborhood, and how did you feel about them?
Page 418 ...
· 57. What kind of pets did you have growing up? What
happened to them?
· 58. Do you remember your tenth and eleventh birthdays?
· 59. List the names of your elementary school teachers.
· 60. Describe your elementary school building on the inside
& outside.
· 60. What was the name(s) of the Junior High that you went
to?
· 61. What was the most influential teacher that you had
during your school days?
· 62. Did you hang around with any kids, and if so, what
were they like?
· 62. What kind of neighbors did you have?
· 63. What kind of trouble did you get into?
HIGH SCHOOL & TEENAGE YEARS. The high school years are years
when
the child is meeting interesting members of the opposite sex, preparing
for their future, and working at their first jobs. It’s a
time
for new beginning as well as turmoils. It is also a time when the
victim will be in many secret rituals, and will be used for many
mind-control assignments. There are no right or wrong answers, if the
client thinks of something else, besides what initially comes to mind,
then it is quite alright to have several "most" events in answer to a
"what is the most...?" type of question.
· 64. What was the craziest thing you ever did in high
school? Why did you do it, and what happened?
· 65. Who was your favorite person during your high school
days?
· 66. Who were your best friends during high school?
· 67. What is the funniest thing that happened to you as a
teenager?
· 68. What did you expect to do when you graduated from high
school?
· 69. Did you go to your high school prom?
· 70. Do you remember any of the nicknames you had for your
teachers?
· 71. What was your favorite subject in school?
· 72. In your opinion, which did you like more in high
school, sports or intellectual pursuits?
· 73. Could you describe what the high school building
looked like?
· 74. Were you active in a church during your high school
days?
· 75. Did you do any great activities with other teenagers
in some religious club or sunday school group?
· 76. Were you a leader of any activity during your high
school days?
· 77. What was it like going to the movies as a teenager in
your area?
· 78. Who were your heros during your teenage years?
· 79. Who were the heroes of your peers when you were a
teenager?
· 80. Did anybody ever accuse you of being dishonest as a
teenager?
· 81. Did you try to pattern your life after anyone, if so
who? do you still admire the qualities you saw in that person?
· 82. What kind of conflicts did you have with your parents?
· 83. What kind of conflicts did you have with your teachers?
· 84. What kind of conflicts did you have with your peers?
· 85. What was your attitude toward drugs and smoking during
your teenage years?
· 86. Was there ever a point in time where you went against
your
parents wishes? tell the story about how you managed to get your way.
Page 419 ...
ADULT LIFE. It almost goes without saying that the therapist is trying
to build rapport with these questions not to interrogate, not to judge,
but simply to listen and learn. Find out what was the most important
thing(s) in the person’s life. Find out what the client
remembers
that was interesting.
· 87. What kind of things were you involved in after high
school?
· 88. Where did you go to college or trade school?
- 89. What was it like to leave home, to go to higher education or to
be on your own?
· 90. Did you join any fraternity or sorority?
· 91. What was your major field of study after you left high
school?
· 92. Did you have any part-time jobs, after you got out of
high school?
· 93. Who were your best friends during the first few years
after high school?
· 94. When was the first time you met your spouse? Describe
the meeting.
· 95. Where did you live after you first got married?
· 96. How much did it cost for different items when you
first
got married, for instance, a packet of bacon, a gallon of gas,a dozen
eggs, a hamburger?
· 97. What did the future look like when you graduated from
high school?
· 98. What did the future look like when you graduated from
college, or a trade school?
- 99. Do you think attitudes about sex have changed for the better or
worse over the years? Why do you think attitudes are changing?
· 100. What did your family think about your first spouse?
What were their reactions?
· 101. Did you have any common interests with your first
spouse, & if so, what?
· 102. Who would you have liked to have married that you
didn’t?
· 103. How would you describe yourself in your twenties?
· 104. From where you are today, when did you decide upon
your
career? When did you first entertain thoughts of this career? Were the
seeds of where your life has ended up present in your early life?
· 105. What do you consider your most important achievement
so far in your life?
· 106. How do you feel about God, and could you please
describe your image of what kind of person God is?
· 107. Did you have military service, and what was that like?
· 108. Are you a flashy dresser, conservative, sloppy,
well-groomed dresser?
· 109. How important is it to dress well?
· 110. What kind of pets did you have in adult life?
· 111. Do you think much about death? Do you fear death?
· 112. What do you think happens to people when they die?
· 113. Did you ever have an ESP experience?
· 114. Did you ever have a ghost experience?
· 115. What do you think about magic?
· 116. What kind of foods do you like? What kinds of foods
do you detest and why?
· 117. What did you think about Watergate?
· 118. Where was the edge of the city when you graduated
from high school, has the city grown since then?
· 119. Is there something that we have failed to talk about
that you feel is important?
There are reasons why each of the questions was selected and why it was
placed in the order that it appears. Those reasons are based upon
experience with mind-control victims. To prepare this list of questions
we looked at several books that were designed to inventory a
person’s life. We were greatly assisted by William
Fletcher’s book Recording Your Family History. Berkeley, CA:
Ten
Speed Press, 1989. The book is an organized guide to asking family
history questions. This or other sourees might provide more ideas on
reconstructing the client’s bio.
Page 420 ...
We will let our support person Fritz write about how a support person
can deal with burn out: Allow me to start by saying, if
you’re
feeling stressed at this moment, take a deep breath, close your eyes
for a moment and then exhale and relax. Burnout hits people who have
nothing more to give. When you have been stressed to the max, the
rewards are not there, and you have all these nagging agitating issues.
Even a well-working piece of equipment will eventually rust--so
don’t be too hard on yourself. Working with programmed
multiples
& implant victims will give a person long periods of distress,
pressures from all angles, & a nauseating feeling that you are
stuck and not going anywhere. I have always found that it’s
healthier mentally & physically for me to be actively doing
something, no matter how small against the mind-control, rather than
being passive in difficult times. In fact, military units often find
that their men handle stress better being on the attack than sitting
around in a defensive mode waiting for the bombs to drop. I manage to
keep a healthy positive outlook by continuing to take steps, even tiny
ones. Attack the problem? You may feel like an ant against an elephant
trying to bite off more than you can chew. There are indeed limits to
what a single person trying to fly solo against the mind-control can
achieve. Try to find some support from a few intelligent listening
people. One therapist cries her heart out to God. Tears are not a bad
idea. Did you know that tears contain stress hormones, so that crying
actually empties the body of stress hormones. (Now wouldn’t
we
like to see our clients do more crying?) If it doesn’t seem
like
anyone, the client, friends, or God is listening to your difficulties,
unfortunately your body quietly is. Emotions are the bridge between the
body and the mind. Interaction between the two need emotions. Remember
the reptilian brain controls the body, and is connected to emotions.
The higher minds control thoughts, and they too are connected to
emotions. Your body will respond to stress, with symptoms like higher
blood pressure. Mine doubled in one year. Obviously, there is a price
to pay for such challenging work. So where does this leave you? If you
can connect with the tragedy of what is happening to your client, then
therapy will take on a purpose. The price you pay will be worth every
drop of sweat, or every diastolic & systolic number on your
blood
pressure. You may have to learn how to blow some things off. Multiples
will say a lot of things. Everyone has buttons. Don’t be hard
on
yourself that you have buttons. My favorite ones are:
· Nobody listens.
· You can’t count on anyone.
· It’s never good enough.
· Don’t tell me what to do or think.
· Is anybody thinking?
Can you identify with any of these, what is on your list of buttons?
Some of us are like ballistic missiles. When our buttons are pushed off
we go. Realizing that we have buttons, and how the firing mechanisms
got put in during our lifetime, can be helpful to diffuse these. A
person only has so much energy and when they are constantly going
ballistic they burn up a lot of energy quick. And if you stuff it under
the emotional rug--you will still bum out, because your body is
connected to the rest of you, and all those unused stress chemicals are
still there. In fact, support team members should look at symptoms like
pain in the gut, headaches, pain in the neck and realize some of these
are simply the stress of all that is being dealt with. Do you have
unresolved emotional or physical pain, that are visible as buttons and
pain?
Perhaps you are wearing down because you have self-doubts, and negative
expectations. Who wants to be like the greek mythological
Page 421 ...
Sisyphus who pushed a boulder up the hill, only to have it roll down
again and again? Don’t devalue your little forward steps.
Keep
taking those steps forward, and recognize your accomplishments. Perhaps
you need to write out what has been accomplished for you the support
person and the client. I discovered that progress reports have been
very-encouraging and well received. Often when I thought that success
was self-evident the system was not able to see any until they read the
progress report. Each of us are unique, and I am in no position to tell
you what will or won’t encourage you or your client. However,
some people have been helped by writing out all their self-doubts and
then dumping them into a trash can. Let’s face it, bad news
is
often not as bad as it seems; and good news is often not as good as it
seems. Throw your doubts away, but do try and get some support. Even if
you are creative and capable, when you begin to get exhausted you will
begin to lose that creative edge to meet the latest challenge. Does the
problem still seem too big to fix? Trying to figure out how to deal
with all kinds of alters as well as people in the external world is a
big chore, and the work keeps accumulating of things that need to be
worked on with your client. I don’t have all the answers, but
part of the answer lies in remaining flexible, learning how to
negotiate and communicate clearly with alters, and part of it lies in
just accepting that some things come with the territory. The trust
issues with programmed multiples are difficult and persistent. They
will wear a person down, in the same fashion that having a boss looking
over your shoulder the entire time gets old. Blow it off. It comes with
the territory. And again, I can’t repeat this enough we need
to
work in teams. I have been greatly revitalized by working with others.
If you think you’ve got problems, put yourself in the
victim’s shoes! With several victims who have just begun,
their
alters asked how long it would be until they were well, &
I’ve told them, ‘Your beginning a long journey,
like
walking from New York to California. If we have to walk the entire
distance, it’s going to be a long journey. If we can do some
flying it will go quicker." I was trying to balance the enormous amount
of work that needs to be done, with the actual truth that some of the
better methods can get a great deal done in short intense periods. I
want the victims of mind-control to see the hope. In order for victims
of mind-control to obtain better results, and to minimize burnout among
therapists/support persons, I suggest that we carry out an ongoing
process to weed out self-defeating habits and behaviors, we continue to
learn new techniques for helping mind-control victims, and that we
continue to give ourselves a chance to grow, and learn too. After all
therapists have needs too. I think the lack of recognition by people
that therapists are people contributes to "therapeutic chronic
fatigue". While the client is wanting to discover their feelings, the
client is expecting the therapist to bury the therapist’s own
feelings. I think that it is healthiest for the support persons to
actually touch base emotionally with everything that is happening to
both the client and the therapist. In the long run, I believe that
burn-out will happen lots slower if the support persons are emotionally
invested in the work, rather than simply being a paid automaton.
Therapists will have less stress, when they have someone that can
mentor them. Victims are tough, they are survivors of a lot of abuse,
& they often survive incompetent therapists. What may seem like
a
tragedy for your multiple may not derail the therapy as much as the
novice might expect. I not suggesting an uncaring attitude,
I’m
just saying that experience brings some calmness. Perhaps
you’re
not in position to put the time & energy into the client that
your
client wants. Sometimes we don’t have perfect answers. If you
are
giving it your best shot, who can complain? Be kind to yourself.
Page 422 ...
If all alters had the same thoughts and were in agreement, this book
would not be needed. The essence of why trauma-based mind-control is so
successful is that their are substantial differences between the
various alters. Those differences allow the Illuminati to create good
front alters as covers. Those differences allow the Illuminati to
maintain control and prevent the system from finding their freedom.
Incompatibilities and conflicts between alters is a given from the
get-go with a DID client. The support team may hear of light and dark
sides to a system. Internal persecutor alters are a given. Alters that
self-mutilate the body have been programmed to do it. Psychologists
have been baffled at the hate that some alters have for other alters or
for those other alter’s body--which they don’t
perceive as
their own body. The longer the programming goes on the more established
the self-persecuting alters become. When dealing with such alters, the
support team must not be judgmental. These are simply hurting child
alters doing what they have been programmed to do. They are simply
trying to do their job right. Without reinforcing these alters
dangerous behaviors, it is possible to give them some attention and
friendship. They are not used to holding the body and will tire of
holding it after a few minutes. Having them out regularly may diffuse
some of their rage. The therapist should not scare them by threatening
to get rid of them, or kill them, although occasionally they need to be
restrained by a support person, for instance if they are trying to
mutilate the victim with a knife. These persecutor alters can have
their identity validated, they were just trying to help the system by
doing the job that was expected by the programmers. The persecutor
alters may often be the ones that took the pain for the "a" alters that
function so well in life. When the host alter acknowledges the
existence of the persecutor alter, and the persecutor alter’s
pain & needs, it helps remove some of the animosity in their
relationship. Alters can write each other letters. Because most systems
are creative, they can use their creativity to think of some way to
resolve the conflict, if they try. However, the answer that may occur
to some readers, to internally lock up persecutor alters is not a good
idea. Someone in the alter system must be the light on the hill, that
moves toward freedom. Generally that will be the front host alter that
came originally came into therapy. It may not be. Sometimes the
original "person" who came in for therapy, dissolves into a mass of
different personalities, and the therapist has trouble knowing who now
is the client. The answer is the entire system is, they just
don’t know it. And who speaks for the system? For instance,
one
alter says for the therapist to quit working with the system and
another says they want the therapist to work, but only the
non-cooperative alters show up for the sessions? All of our old ways of
looking at people are obsolete, and the support team will encounter
difficulties that boggle their mind. One way to overcome some of this
is to treat a system as a city. How did God treat the church of a city?
How does one relate to a city of people? How does one get cooperation
in a city. Within an alter system, the change for health has to come
family by family. One family of alters after another family must make
the choice "I want to change direction. I don’t want to be
like
my abuser. I don’t want to conform to the programming." Many
alters will not really know what is going on, they will only have a
sense of it. They will sense, "Something is wrong here." That may be
enough for them to make a decision for a change of direction.
Persecutor alters can learn not to act out. Alters can be given another
script. Each alter can be shown that the system has gratitude for the
part they played in the system’s survival. Things that are
helpful for alters are good reading, good friends, support groups, and
Page 423 ...
learning from each other internally. Some alters can clearly see the
good from the bad, some have very limited understanding. The system can
begin taking their power back. The alters can work as a team, and
become co-conscious. Responsible alters can be given the care of other
alters who need attention. It’s somewhat like how a teacher
may
delegate some children to be leaders so that they can help the troubled
children. Internal peer pressure can work for good too. And alters can
pray for each other too. Light side alters can form prayer circles or
prayer chains. Even non-multiples have ego-states that can present
problems, such as the part of you that wants to eat too many sweets.
How is this overcome? By mental discipline. It will take some mental
discipline for the victim to grow. Alters need to change their thinking
from "I can’t to I can." Get rid of "I can’t."
Getting rid
of fear is a big step in overcoming alter conflicts. This is just one
more reason why safety for the system is so important.
Most competition for having the body by alters occurs during the
following times:
a. when cult programming goes off, and part of the system is trying to
go to a ritual or a drug run, and the light side alters are holding the
body.
b. when something exciting or fun is happening and everyone wants a
piece of the action.
c. when alters are in conflict over goals or in conflict about what the
system is doing in therapy.
Originally, the alter switches were subconscious and carried out mainly
by the handlers. After getting to know one’s internal system
better, the alters can begin to control their own switching. The alters
need to build harmony. If they change the internal job description, or
give an alter an external job, then that alter needs to be allowed to
have that role. The alter can be asked internally, "What would you like
to do?" and then give that alter a chance to develop that. Give
everyone an important role. After a while of working together, the
alters begin to get co-conscious. After alters are co-conscious, the
conflicts will cease between them.
Page 424 ...
WARNING!!!
This page is not to be read by any victims of mind-control, no if's,
and's, or but's. Reading this material may be highly lethal -- it will
trigger powerful suicide programs in some victims of mind-control!!!
CORE ISSUES
The core issues are issues that concern the basic survival of the mind.
Therapists have blamed victims for not cooperating in integrating the
core, when a fuller understanding of the dynamics of programming shows
that the victim is only attempting to protect himself. In 1960, J.D.
Sutherland at the second Tavistock seminar on mother-infant interaction
in London presented his work which was entitled "The concepts of
imprinting and critical period from a psycho-analytic viewpoint." This
was reprinted in a book Determinants of Infant Behavior II. Sutherland
discovered that traumatic frustration experiences in a
child’s
early development set up subsystems in a person, which continue to seek
expression, and are relatively little influenced by subsequent
experiences. The formation of social relationships by an infant relates
to the concept of imprinting. Researchers have not sorted out all the
complex processes, but imprinting researchers feel confident that
imprinting in humans has some parallels to precocial birds. They found
that newborn babies less than a day old will follow a real face much
more than a mannequin. This proved for instance that babies are
programmed prior to birth to respond to human faces. There are
obviously some built-in mechanisms to human thinking. The human brain
is actually 7 brains. The lower three brains are: one, the medulla;
two, the pons; and three, the cerebellum. On top of the pons, is the
fourth brain, the mid-brain. The mid-brain is the central brain linking
the 3 higher and the 3 lower brains. It relays messages back and forth.
It regulates the life force, and serves as a regulator to states of
consciousness. Secretions in the fourth brain create the emotional
construct of "me’. If traumatized, such as during the
splitting-the-core trauma, the mid-brain does not secrete the peptides
or endorphines which relate to the self-sense that is attached to a
sensory experience. In other words, when the core is split, the
mid-brain ceases to secrete the peptides that emotionally connect its
potential sense of self to the sensations of the body. The mid-brain is
also the area that is imprinted with roles. Each one of the 7 brains
that make up the entire structure called the human brain is capable of
having feelings. This is one reason why we can have "mixed feelings"
about one item. What seems to occur during the splitting of the core
(referred to as the Primal Dissociate Experience PDE), is that the mind
decides that survival is dependent upon not identifying with what is
happening. In a sense it decides that death to the self is a type of
survival. The mind creates dissociated "ego states" (what Sutherland
called "subsystems") to deal with these difficult situations that it
refuses to accept into its memory as happening to itself. Deep level
ISH (internal self-helpers--perhaps Guardian angels) have been
successfully used to reintegrate the PDE held in that special part of
the mind back into the mind.
Page 425 ...
When the brain’s senses try to record the PDE, the mind
disconnects itself from the experience. Body memories remain of the
experience, and dissociated memory fragments. The mind disassembles its
concept of self. It decouples itself from existence and goes into
hiding. The rest of the victim’s life will be spent by the
"core"
retreating deeper into hiding. When the mind, decouples itself from the
body and takes itself into hiding, it permits dissociated pieces of the
mind to pick up the abuse. One of the positive pieces of the original
splitting experience will be used to create a host(s) personality. This
is the person that will front the system. (Shortly an entire
explanation of all this will follow.) The retreating "remnant of life",
after it has let the self die and the mind be splintered is really only
that part of the mid-brain which regulates the life-force and the soul.
There is no alter that is the real core. ANY alter that claims to be
the core, is a false front developed by the programmers. The real core
is an essence--the soul, the deep part of the mind that remains alive
when the central controls of the fourth brain completely decouples
itself from identifying with life. In reality, the area of the brain
that is normally imprinted by the events of life and grows up with a
concept of self has decided to separate itself from external reality
and goes into hiding. A variation of this is autism. In this case, the
complete mind retreats from reality, rather than the soul. Many
therapists ignorantly set their primary goal with DID programmed
multiples to be the integration of the core. They are ignoring the
fundamental issue for the victim’s mind. The fundamental
issue is
that the core’s survival demanded separation from external
reality, and the creation of separate dissociative states to contain
the traumas being heaped upon the victim. The driving motivation at the
deepest level of the mind is to preserve the safety of this elusive
core. Traditional therapies have worked against helping victims,
because these therapies attempt to expose the core to reality, which
aggravates and strengthens deep resistance by the victim to therapy,
because the decoupling from reality is the imprinted survival mechanism
of the mind. The Illuminati try to insure that the core never wants to
rejoin the world by:
a. programming many alters to believe that they will go psychotic or
kill themselves if the core is touched,
b. that trauma keeps the core distant, therefore, the greater the
victim’s ongoing abusive relationship with the cult, then the
greater the "safety" of the core.
c. internal worlds are created with walls protected by demons and
suicide programs to prevent alters from reintegrating or connecting
with anything else such as the core.
d. internal conflicts are set up to keep the alters fighting and
disconnected from each other. Alters which fear the abusers must
somehow resolve their fear with alters who identify with and mimic
their abusers. The mess that is created, sets up an environment that
places the core in an impossible situation. If the sense-of-self were
ever to return to rejoin reality, how would it ever resolve all these
conflicts or live with such a mess in reality? The sense-of-self may
subconsciously give its energy to part of the mind, but it is not doing
so in a conscious manner, because it has detached itself from
identifying with what is going on.
Page 426 ...
The Illuminati perceive the core as that soul, that breathe of life
that God breathed into Adam, to make him a living soul. This is not
entirely off-base. The energy of an alter system comes from that 4th
brain which is also that area of the brain that is involved with
one’s sense of self. The programmers perceive that the
core’s existence only remains in its ability to create parts
of
the mind to maintain its life. The core is like a soul--perhaps it is
the soul of a person, and it creates alters to maintain its own
integrity and safety. The Illuminati carry out a final ritual when a
hierarchy person is ritually murdered where the successor sucks the
dying person’s last breath out in order to capture the soul.
Whatever the exact substance and nature of the core, whatever the
detailed mechanics within the brain were when it dissociated itself
from reality, the core still remains a very touchy issue for
therapists. Therapists should approach alters that are core splits with
great gentleness, honesty, love and kindness. Back door techniques
should be used for talking through to a system of alters without
attempts to go directly toward the "core". Attempts to go directly
toward the core will most likely be frustrated and stopped by the
victim’s alter system, but the energy that is wasted in such
a
move is not healthy. If a child victim were never to suffer trauma
after the initial core split, the programmers discovered that at some
point years down the line, the core will want to reconnect to reality.
Now that we have explored some of the basics concerning the core, it is
time to discuss the deeper realities of what happens to the core during
programming. This information has never seen the light of day. We are
able to provide it, because sad-to-say, our system had a level of
programming alters who programmed and helped with the tests that showed
what we are about to reveal. Until recently, the world (with the
exception of the programmers) was too iguorant to be able to understand
what we will reveal. We trust that there are a small group of
therapists that are now ready to utilize the deeper secrets of what
happens to the core. Remember, that the Vol. 2 book discussed the PDE,
the Splitting of the Core trauma. This is actually a long series of
traumas, that culminates in the mind deciding to split itself with
dissociative barriers. This original PDE trauma provides some parts of
the mind that love their master and some parts that fear (fear as in
raw terror) the master. These two themes--LOVE & FEAR-- are
skillfully used by the programmers to build a protective shield around
the core for the front part (host part) of the system. The front part
is built from the first PDE and then it is left in relative "peace" so
that it has enough stability to function in the real world. That
doesn’t mean the front has a life of ease, it just
isn’t
subjected to what the deeper parts have to endure.
The deeper parts will be derived from the second major programming
trauma of the system. But before we get into that, let’s
briefly
touch on the LOVE/FEAR issues that protect the core. The love that the
core has for its primary caretaker (refer back to Vol. 2, chptr. one,
where it describes the excellent caretaking
Page 427 ...
& love bonding) is powerful and pertains to parent-young
imprinting
learning. There is a susceptible period that is built in during those
first two years, where the psychic organizer emerges. (Refer to Hess,
Eckard H. Imprinting Early Experience & the Developmental
Psychobiology of Attachment, p. 340.) It has been clearly demonstrated
by scientific research that the baby has an innate drive for love from
a mother figure. This love is a primary need of the infant--without
this love, some babies give up and die. This is not surprising, many
people can realize this without the specific scientific proof. That
primal need for love is exploited by the programmers. The parts of the
mind holding this powerful primal love will split from the parts
holding the raw terror of the PDE. When one tries to approach getting
to the core from the host level, the alters holding the love of the
master will protect the core. What has been discovered then is that the
fear then protects that love. There are lots of silhouetted parts
brought into this love-fear relationship of alters. This love-fear
relationship has defeated the best therapists, because until the
therapist can unravel such situation and these issues the mind will not
let them get to the real core. Because the basis for the original
splitting was RAW TERROR on the part of the core, it goes into hiding.
It is very difficult for the core to be accessed, because he/she will
only appear if he/or she has absolute and great trust in who is calling
it up. As far as we know, there has never been a genuine core accessed
by anyone outside of the Illuminati/& other programming cults.
The
Illuminati must have a very caring Mother-of-Darkness establish a trust
relationship with the core BEFORE the PDE. This tender loving
Mother-of-Darkness then can be used to pull up the core for work.
Because our system (your author Cisco) was noted for its tenderness, we
often received the job of being the "Mother" for systems which were
being programmed. That is why we can pass on so much of the real
secrets of what the core is all about. Hypnotic access codes are given
to the core, which work only if used by that individual which the core
greatly trusts. Working with the core splits which have the love/fear
dichotomy does not establish rapport with the core. The real core has
retreated far into the mind--under the basement of the mind, and lays
under the hell pit that is built by the Illuminati at the basement of
the mind. (What this means is that some of what was written in Vol. 2
about the carousel was cover programming. Splits from the core are
strategically placed in the system to make those who work very hard
think they have gotten to the core. This is not just for the protection
of the programming, but this safety feature also protects the very life
of the programmed multiple. It is not a safe thing for a programmed
multiple’s core to be played with.) When a tender mother
pulls a
core up, what will she find? The core comes up in its fear. Centuries
of Illuminati programming experience have clearly demonstrated that the
core is the only part of the mind that has a true awareness of itself,
such as its age, and a reality of its own. However, because the core
stays in the basement of mind, it does not experience life. When it is
pulled up, it will look around, notice that it has aged, wonder where
the years have gone, but it doesn’t go into denial or into
psychotic fantasy or some other defense.
Page 428 ...
It will simply accept reality, and reject all the fantasy. The core
will NOT remember its memories of abuse. It may have some issues
regarding some things, but its thinking is healthy and true to itself.
Again the core is the only part that is true to her or his self. The
programmers do use the core for some types of programming, but not in
the sense that they use alters. The host (front) personality that lives
in the day-to-day world will be strongly grounded in reality, but in a
different way than the core. With the exceptions of the few host
personalities that experience life day-to-day and the core, who can
somehow access the truth when it awakes and comes to the front of the
mind, MOST of the alters live at the age they were created at or have
been hypnotically assigned. They do not experience life in a
3-dimension matter-space-time world. Life is 2-dimensional, without a
concept of time. The Illuminati prefer they don’t wear
watches
for this reason. After lots of integration work, trust work, and memory
work, it may be possible to access the core through some of its closer
splits. Before discussing the second major programming trauma to the
core, it is extremely important to disclose a major secret that the
Illuminati programmers came up against. In fact, due to their prideful
beliefs that they were gods, it was a rather touchy sensitive subject
to talk about when we worked with major programmers. In spite of it
being a touchy subject, it was such a major subject, we did have some
conversations concerning it. The programmers called it "THE ETERNAL
LIGHT". It was also referred to as "the SOUL". Different programmers
speculated about what this light was, a few thought it was the Guardian
Angel that God assigued to each person, one thought it was the part of
man that would face Almighty God on judgement day, and "bow its knee".
(If it’s hard for the reader to conceive that Illuminati
programmers know Biblical verses such as "all knees will bow before
God" and theological concepts, then read Aleister Crowley, who as a
Satanist, knew Bible concepts and theology in detail. Also remember,
some Christian ministers have a secondary vocation as Illuminati
programmers.) It can be understood why programmers (who of course were
Illuminati masters & adepts) would call this LIGHT "the soul"
because they were steeped in Greek philosophy. The concept of the
immortality of the soul was an idea of the mystery religions of
Babylon, and was elaborated upon by the Greek philosopher Plato. This
greek philosophical idea of the word "soul" clouds the biblical meaning
for the word. In the Hebrew scriptures the word "soul" is the Hebrew
word "nephesh" and in the Greek, it is "psykhe". In the Word of God,
Genesis 2:7 states, "And the LORD God formed man of the dust of the
ground, and breathed into his nostrils the breath of life; and man
became a living being (nephesh)." What is significant here is that man
was not given a soul (nephesh), but rather "became a living soul". The
Greek scriptures also say in 1 COR 15:45, "The first man Adam BECAME a
living soul (psycke)". It is clear from many other scriptures that soul
(nephesh and psykhe--psykhai in plural form) meant the body and mind of
a person. This nephesh can die. EZE 18:4b states, "The soul
Page 429 ...
(nephesh) who sins shall die." However, though the soul (mind and body)
dies, the spirit returns to God, who gave it. ECC 12:7, "Then the dust
will return to the earth as it was, And the spirit will return to God
who gave it." The Bible uses the Hebrew word ruach and the Greek word
pneuma for our word "spirit." It is very clear in numerous scriptures
that the spirit is a powerful active force which has intellect. It is a
person. The Holy Spirit could be blasphemed, and lied to. In turn it
taught, and spoke and comforted. If a spirit can speak, teach and
comfort, what is it? In programming, we programmers came in contact
with this spirit that God places in each person, and it caused us fits.
Each person’s God-given spirit was a powerful light that had
intellect which attached itself to the core, but could be separated
from the core. When the core comes up, this attached light form (the
God-given spirit) would come up with it. This God-given spirit had no
memory of abuse, it simply had energy, intellect and a power to protect
the core. The essence of this God-given spirit was impossible for
pre-verbal children or young children to describe. It has been the
object of scientific research. One thing that the Illuminati have long
known about this God-given spirit--it never works, it never takes on
any responsibilities, like the entire rest of the system will do. The
rest of the system will be a system of dissociative pieces of the mind,
and alters who often have some type of job. This isn’t the
case
for the God-given spirit, or what the programmers called THE ETERNAL
LIGHT. From experience it is also clear that the eternal light,
although it wasn’t the core, somehow was a reflection, a
total
reflection of the core. We knew these things as oath-bound Luciferian
programmers, long before we ever contemplated getting to know the
Christian God. The Spirit was an intelligent life-force, a preserver of
life. When the major programmers got into big trouble and their child
slave was going to die, go insane or was splintering uncontrollably,
even though they disliked the ETERNAL LIGHT because it was more
powerful than they were, they would call it up, and get it to assist in
bringing healing, life, and integration to the victim. This God-given
spirit was like God’s own spirit, in that it gives its help
to
the good and bad alters, the just and the unjust alters. It is
reminiscent of Christ’s words, "Your Father in heaven...He
makes
His sun rise on the evil and on the good, and sends rain on the just
and on the unjust." MT 5:45 The Eternal Light can integrate parts of
the core or as far as that goes any alters that have split. It is so
powerful that the Programmers know that if they pull it up and attach
it to alters that they are torturing, that it will provide a protective
covering so hard that they can’t cause the mind to splinter.
Another thing that centuries of programming experience has shown is
that the eternal light does not know that it is connected to the core.
The God-given spirit needs to be taught if it is know that it is
connected to the core. The programmers of course do not teach this to
it. The Illuminati have done lots of tests (and we observed some of
these) where the core and its God-given spirit were allowed to spend
positive time with a portion of alters. The core and its
Page 430 ...
spirit would automatically integrate all these parts back together.
Therapists spend hundreds of hours trying to get cooperation between
alters, and yet the core and its spirit can integrate them in a flash
if given a safe opportunity. Now you’re beginning to see the
power of a safe environment for the core. However, the top therapists
(Dr.s of Psychiatry) are out on speaking circuit teaching that it
doesn’t matter if your client is safe, you can still
accomplish
good. As a victim would you like to cross the Pacific swimming or
flying in a 747 jet? Or to make the analogy more accurate, which choice
would you want if you couldn’t even swim? When Fritz, our
co-author worked 24 hours a day to provide our system a safe place,
numerous therapists and deliverance ministries came out of the woodwork
to publicly attack him. A few wise people are beginning to realize that
safety of the victim IS THE NUMBER ONE ISSUE, AND THE BEGINNING ISSUE.
If the victim is left alone in safety and with trustworthy loving
people, at some point the core and its God-given spirit could integrate
everything back in an effortless manner. Certain people are beginning
to realize that the main part of a treatment plan is safety.
(Unfortunately, the safety issues are far more vast than therapists
care to admit. This book and the Vol. 2 Formula book are laying the
foundation down for how varied and technologically advanced their
control is. An afternoon with a Christian minister is not going to
provide the security for the mind to let down its protective
mechanisms. What is happening when skilled Christian ministers access
what they think is the core, is that they are getting at best core
splits. Having core splits heal is very powerful. That means that
foundational sections of programming are automatically ripped up. One
major drawback that is preventing more success is that the core is not
understood, and the issues of safety are not being understood and
addressed. When the God-given spirit joins itself to a group of alters,
the Illuminati testing shows that it can take on a memory, bring the
core along, and make that section the leader of the pack in the mind.
In fact, knowledge of this is going to be used unfortunately for great
evil, rather than for the good of humanity. Soon the Anti-Christ is to
take power. At pre-arranged points in time, the hierarchy alters are to
be given the core and the Eternal Light, and the rest of the minds of
these slaves will be placed hypnotically under the hell-pit, where the
cores are presently asleep. This means thousands of hierarchy
Illuminati members will switch from their Christian host personalities,
into people who day-to-day have very strong luciferian personalities
which serve the Anti-Christ. Therapists, who have spent years in
agonizing patient work using primitive often-damaging methods to help
their programmed multiples, are going to see their work go down the
drain literally overnight. A therapist, who has spent 10 years piddling
around with stabilizing a few front alters, will find they no longer
exist within the working part of the client’s mind. Some of
these
therapists are even targeted to be killed. Some of these therapists are
Illuminati multiples themselves, who will go back to continue helping
with the large-scale operations of mind-control programming.
Page 431 ...
In order to deceive both the therapists and the victims themselves, the
programmers carry out several well-designed, excellently executed
deceptions. An early split of the mind is pulled up which will perceive
itself as light. This part will be shamed and called "bad magic, and
treated like it is the core. It will then be placed in a box and sent
into the outer-space of the victim’s mind. A few young
watcher
alters will see this, and believe they have spotted the core being
placed in a box. This light will be allowed to come up to help the
system when it is in trouble. Because it is not the real core, it
can’t protect other alters. When the alters in trouble see
that
they are not being helped, they feel betrayed by the core, and feel
helpless. They have no idea how powerful the real core can really be.
In fact some alters are programmed to believe that the core is
responsible for their problems. Some of the alters walk around
internally with a bad attitude toward the core. The programmers put the
core to sleep with the sleeping beauty story.
Another early core split will be placed in the carousel, along with 3
demons ask to function as a false trinity, and many mirrors for
entrapment. Other core splits will be placed as blackmail in special
castles. These will often be called ‘the core" by the
programmers
in order to confuse the victim. The second major core programming
trauma takes place in a sensory deprivation tank under a controlled LSD
trip. Readers can consult Chapter 3 of this Deeper Insights book,
approx. page 28-32 for a description of how the sensory deprivation
tank programming under LSD is carried out. The initial sensory
deprivation trauma is done with the core and it shows no mercy upon the
mind of the victim. The Illuminati want to have the victim go through
the eight emotions and the five senses, in other words 13 categories of
splitting. During the sensory deprivation experience they want the
victim to go through love, fear, anger, confusion, pain, shame,
despair, self-hate, and then the loss of each of the five senses (one
by one) taste, hearing, pain, hot-cold, seeing, and finally a sense of
being nothing. The mind of even the child victim is vast. As the lonely
isolation and torture begins in the isolation tank, the mind finally
reaches a point where it begins splitting and splitting. When the child
is splitting due to fear, at some point the mind reaches exhaustion of
this feeling, and begins entering into another response, perhaps anger.
The mind will unravel in dissocation with the new emotion until again
the mind switches and tries another response to its entrapment. The
body is wide open for demonic forces to take advantage of the
pained/drug state of the child’s mind. The Illuminati work to
demonize the child while it is suffering under the full impact of the
sensory isolation tank. Gradually the child begins to die. As the mind
under LSD begins to feel its molecules evaporating into nothinguess,
the child approaches death. The mind gives away the body. Then the
spirit--the Eternal Light leaves the body. After years of experience,
the Illuminati has scientifically figured out how long they can wait
after what they call the "soul"--the God-given spirit leaves, before
they hit the child with electroshock to revive its life. The core
really believes it has died. (Chapter 10 of this book addresses the
manipulation of near-death experiences by the Illuminati.) The
Illuminati literally snatch the life of the child back into its body.
Page 432 ...
Now the job comes to take the 13 different stages and to build alters
from those different dissociative states. From the state where the core
has given up identity with its body, no longer sees itself as human,
and considers itself dead, the Illuminati will take these hundreds or
thousands of dissociative pieces and program them to see themselves as
butterflies. In the sensory deprivation tank they are like tiny fficks
of light. But the hypnotic suggestion is given that they are
butterflies. This is just one of many reasons why the term Monarch
programming is appropriate. These parts of the mind will make up one of
the most secret parts of an Illuminati system. We are now revealing
this secret grid for the first time. The butterflies are placed into
the first grid of alters near the core. This grid forms a net around
the core. These butterflies are floaters, that encircle the core. This
is the sixth grid, but in Illuminati programmer parlance the grid is
called a "DIMENSION". These protective butterflies are dehumanized and
hold the victim’s final fear as the victim died. Only four
strong
splits from this time period of the tank trauma are not made into
butterflies. They are made into four cornerstones (also called the
"FOUR GATES TO HEAVEN", north, east, west, and south. These become the
points of the compass upon which the system of alters will be
structured. The four gates to heaven create a foundational pattern for
an internal clock, a compass, and a seasonal/ritual clock. Another set
of alters that will come from the tank experience are the gems. The
gems are discussed in Vol. 2. They will be placed in the first
dimension, along with a carousel. From the gems, ribbons will be
created that run to the internal computers. The ribbons will have to
learn access codes and other codes to mediate between the gems and the
computers on each of the levels (dimensions). Each of the six main
dimensions (also called sections on the alter grids that the handler
carries around), will have a mirror. Of course the programmer can
create any configuration he wants, but the 13 x 13 x 13 cube is a very
common Illuminati system. Other common configurations area sphere, and
a double pyramid. The Illuminati like to give a 3-D effect to their
alter systems. The sequence of splitting alters from alters goes
horizontally and vertically and downward. To chart out a genealogy of
the time sequence on how alters arrived becomes a series of breaks in
several directions. Needless to say, the programmers do chart all these
breaks. They also keep a resevior of unused clean slate alters. The
programmers are unable to touch the God-given spirit. This Eternal
Light remains unsplintered and powerful throughout the life of the
victim. It is hidden along with the core to prevent integration of the
victim’s mind. While it is possible for the cult to bring the
core up, it doesn’t serve any purpose for them to injure the
core
after they have created a system. There will always be a part of the
core they cannot reach unless they destroy the individual.
Page 433 ...
Theories that the most cult obedient and mean alters are those farthest
from the core are not based on reality. There is some partial
correctness to the concept that those victims who have a better
connection between their core and their alters heal better, but when
the actual programming sequence and methodology is laid out for the
reader as we have done in our books, hopefully the reader will realize
that most of the time the core is sleeping (Sleeping Beauty) and thinks
she is dead and waiting for her Prince to kiss her and bring her back
to life. She is not lurking in the background cognizant of every
conversation like some therapists have begun telling each other. A
sound strategy for working on the core issues, would be to get the
system in a place of complete safety, and then work to stabilize the
system of alters, and then begin doing memory work and building trust.
When the mind is ready, then some core split alters can be healed as a
potential gateway to lowering the fears of the core. Some of the
readers of this book will not have a Christian perspective. We
encourage them to see the healing power of forgiveness, and love that a
Christlike view offers to victims. In the reality of the real world,
all men have sinned and come short of the glory of God. The core was
not evil--it was simply a helpless innocent victim of overwhelming
abuse. Of anybody who can understand pain, it is the Son of God
(Emmanuel) who suffered innocently like-the core did. As the ministers
preach, we are all guilty of the death of Christ. This means that terms
like "man of God", "perpetrator" and "victim" begin to lose much
meaning as we approach the glorious brilliant light of Christ. Without
forgiveness, we are all sinners worthy of death. But we are also the
apple of God’s eye. There is nothing that can stand in the
way of
His forgiving love if we want it in our lives. One of the biggest
proofs of that redeeming love of God Almighty, has been carefully
hidden by the programmers--it is that Eternal Light, that God-given
spirit that the programmers have never conquered.
Page 434 ...
DELIVERANCE, understanding
Today, we live in a dark age. We trust that you will find some exciting
liberating ideas within this article. Christ wondered if he would find
any faith left when he returned. The answers we will provide you in
this article are not something you will find in the establishment
churches, but are fresh revelations from the throne of God. Fritz
&
I have worked together on this article, and this article will reflect
what we have been taught by the Holy Spirit. As anyone, who has read
about total mind-control, can realize, victims of ‘total
mind-control are in the greatest need for deliverance that one could
imagine. Why don’t victims just choose health? Why
don’t
victims simply walk out and grab their freedom? The answer goes back to
understanding love and free-will. God gave free-will to that part of
His creation that can know good & evil, especially humankind.
That
was His sovereign choice, and it was an action based on the nature of
God which is love. Love does not seek its own, but seeks to build
others up. The Kingdom of God has as its foundation love. We are called
to speak truth in love. Satan’s Kingdom is built upon fear.
How
many churches operate on the foundation of fear? Sadly too many. Satan
constructs all his governments, whether judicial, political or
religious on a foundation of fear. He then takes that foundation of
fear, and applies it in such a way as to get fear’s maximum
leverage power to motivate people. While applying trauma along with
drugs and hypnosis to people’s lives, Satan gets the maximum
leverage out of their fear. He uses the greatest power he can get out
of fear to harden the points where people have free choice. Imagine a
piece of farm machinery that has been allowed to rust and harden. The
joints, the hinges no longer have freedom of movement. They are rusted
into one position. The joints have lost their freedom of choice. Now
the farmer comes along and applies a lubricant to clean and loosen
those frozen joints. The deliverance minister is finding the juncture
of choice and he is pouring kindness upon that frozen juncture, and
that oil of kindness lubricates it free. Now the person has freedom of
choice. A spirit is love applied to the frozen hardened joints of life
is a deliverance ministry. Sometimes unfortunately, the rust is so hard
that the person must be broken, because the place where the free-will,
the place where their options were stolen can not be restored. Satan
knows that people would naturally choose paradise, would naturally
choose love & good things. First, God created man in His own
image,
and we still have a built in desire to do saintly things, although our
perfect nature has been corrupted. Satan must trick, and tweak, and
loop and snake our free will, to the point that we will give up our
freedom, that we will give up our free will, and that we will agree to
his life of bondage. That is what Fritz’s half of the book
was
about. In Fritz’s half, he showed how Satan destroys that
free
will, how he shifts and snakes, he deceives, he manipulates and bends,
and muddies the waters until a person doesn’t know where he
is,
nor what his choices are. After all the horrendous programming, the
victim "willingly" wants to give up their free will, but at that time
the alters do not even realize what they are giving up nor what is
going on. God continues to gently call people to Him. It is a wooing. A
man is wooed by a pretty girl, not compelled. God’s beauty
compellingly woos us. However, some churches because they are not on
the right foundations, see something wrong with someone and they come
over and lay their hands on them and knock ‘em down. The idea
of
coming up to people and attacking their demons is spiritual rape. The
demons do have to obey certain
Page 435 ...
spiritual laws, but "raping" people was not Christ’s method
of
deliverance. Let’s look at the way Christ dealt with people
and
demonic problems.
· The mother of Zebedee’s son comes to him, and he
says, "What do you wish?" (MT 20:21)
· The multitudes come to him, and Christ says, "What do you
want Me to do for you?" (MT 20:32)
· James & John come to Christ, and he says,
‘What do you want Me to do for you?" MK 10:36
· A blind man on the road to Jerico comes to Christ, and
Christ
asks, ‘What do you want Me to do for you?" MK 10:5 1, LK 18:4
1
· Two of John’s disciples approach Jesus, and
Christ asks, ‘What do you seek?" JN 1:38
· At the marriage supper, a woman asks a favor &
Christ
asks, ‘Woman, what does your concern have to do with me?" (JN
2:4)
Christ told his disciples that whatever they asked in faith, that is
what their heavenly Father would give them. (MK 11:24) Christ is very
similar to the Father, he waited until people asked and explained what
they wanted. The entire course or tenor of Christ’s life was
a
savior who waited until a person’s free will was ready for a
deliverance. Christ wooed people to God. There is no wooing people to
God, when demons are forcibly eradicated without a person’s
consent. Does that mean that there is no place for aggressive
deliverance? If we wait for some people to ask for freedom, they may
never ask. With victims of mind-control, the controlling demons are
sealed over and hidden quite deeply and Lucifer allows other demons to
protect him in the system. Jesus went in and cleansed the temple of the
money changers. Here was a situation where God’s temple was
being
desecrated. Most people are not aware of how the money changers were
desecrating God’s temple, so allow us to explain this. The
nation
of Israel was to be the light of earth through which God poured His
blessings out on mankind. The nation of Israel was to bless the world.
Instead, the religious spirits lorded over the nation. The Israelites
scorned everyone else (the Gentiles) as unclean. The temple’s
outer court was where the gentiles were to be ministered to &
were
to come to God. Instead the Jews gave it over to a Spirit of Mammon.
Money changers were blocking the purpose of that area of the Temple,
which was meant to be the salvation of the unclean, not the enrichment
of the self-righteous. Notice the religious judging spirit in the
Temple rulers, for soon afterwards they were judging Jesus for spending
time with children in the Temple. Jesus was hoping they would learn a
lesson, he said, "Yes. And have you never read what is written in the
Psalms, ‘Out of the mouth of babes and little ones, thou hast
made thy praise perfect?" There is a place in God’s hearts
for
child alters & baby alters. And this then leads us to one of
the
best illustrations of deliverance in the Word of God. Jesus told the
story of a man on the lonely road to Jerico. He had been attacked by a
gang of robbers and left in the ditch for dead. Two religious men came
by and judged him as unclean. The judging spirits that were in their
hearts convinced these men of the lie that you get better by avoiding
the unclean, rather than ministering to the unclean. (We have seen our
share of ministers who have hated to see people working with programmed
multiples. Fritz lost most of his Christians friends in order to work
with us. Some of them got angry that someone would want to help someone
like us.) But there was a Samaritan that came along. Now remember, the
Samaritan was considered unclean and a dog by the men with the
religious judging spirits. The religious judging spirit
doesn’t
want to enter into a real walk with God, and it will do all it can to
prevent others. But this Samaritan who was considered unclean by the
religious, comes and pulls the man out of the pit, and dresses his
wounds, which means squeezing out the dross. He gives the man food and
water to promote life. He pours in all this stuff into the
Page 436 ...
man’s wounds. Then he binds the wounds so that the skin will
form
a protection. He took what had carried him through life (his own donkey
or horse) and took him to a place of safety and protection. But the
Samaritan didn’t consider his deliverance over. He wanted to
get
the man to the end point. So he gave the inn keeper money, and told the
inn keeper to take care of him, and if he ran up a bill, the Samaritan
would take care of it on a return trip. THIS was a real deliverance
ministry. This was a real deliverance. The religious heap the burdens
of the cross or many crosses onto other people. The real deliverance
ministries are like the "religiously unclean" Samaritan. When the
religious leaders of Jesus’ day came to him and asked him on
what
authority he did his good works, Jesus told them a story. "But what do
you think? A man had two sons, and he came to the first and said,
‘Son, go, work today in my vineyard.’ He answered
and said,
‘I will not,’ but afterward he regretted it and
went.
‘Then he came to the second and said likewise. And he
answered
and said, ‘I go, sir,’ but he did not go. Which of
the two
did the will of his father?" They said to Him, "The first." Jesus said
to them, "Assuredly, I say to you that tax collectors and harlots enter
the kingdom of God before you." Today, we have a entire class of
professional ministers (master pastors) who are ministered to by their
congregations. They consider the idea of stopping to bandage up the
unclean to be repulsive. The broken souls of the programmed multiples
are those who Christ came to deliver. He cameto set the captives free.
The deliverance ministry will visit those who are in the prisons
created by mind-control programming, they will give food and water to
those in these "prisons" and liberate them. Deliverance is love in
action. The oil and wine that the Samaritan put on the man’s
wounds are symbolic of the power & authority of God that we
minister to people. They are also symbolic of the grace and truth.
Another parallel meaning to the oil & wine is the anointing and
the
new life that are given to those that the world has left for dead in
the gutter. Deliverance is a restoration. The goal of the restoration
is new life, the ultimate goal of deliverance is the ultimate new life
in Christ. The new life in Christ is when Christ is on the throne in a
person’s life. That is a distant goal for some programmed
multiples. However, we must not elevate the process above the goal. In
deliverance ministries today, many of them have elevated the process
above the goal. We must keep the authority of Christ as the number one
issue, and keep beholding him as an example to us. As the correct
foundation is built, a godly structure based upon the His five
attributes comes into being. (See the article on "Protection,
Spiritual") then the lower level demons can’t handle the heat
given off by the light of truth and they rise to the surface as dross
and can be dealt with. The deeper big daddy demons are going to take a
special deliverance similar to Christ’s cleansing of the
temple.
When the Holy Spirit has a claim on someone’s life, then a
Temple
cleansing may be in store. We must insure to lose good spirits to
replace evil ones. The Children of Light do not negotiate with
darkness. Darkness does not want to negotiate with light anyway. The
Child of God walks in peace, because he is secure in who his Father is.
This does not mean that he tempts God by bungy jumping every situation.
It means that he doesn’t walk in fear, but that he takes with
him
the real keys to the Kingdom of God which are light, life and love.
Love, light and life in their fullest meanings will open doors to
riches that the slave could never dream of.
Deliverance is not a short term work. For a programmed multiple it will
be a life of healing. When God continues to build his structure in you
(see page 365), replacing the satanic structure, God will begin resting
more
Page 437 ...
of His glory within His structure. God’s glory will expose
and
help cleanse the Temple. It will make the victim want to work hard to
keep the Temple clean. Some people think that God simply wants to put
His anointing onto people. He is trying to build His structure within
His willing children. After that structure (His nature and character is
built) then the anointing has a place to rest. Prayer, which is based
upon the five elements of God’s structure, is like an
offensive
lance. The armor of God listed in Ephesians 6 includes 6 items. It does
not mention anything that is clearly offensive. Prayer is offensive and
aggressive in nature. It is seeking that which we do not have. Prayer
can deliver a wound into the enemy through which supernatural love can
be poured in to melt the hard spots that Satan has created. One of the
five elements of God’s structure is life, which means growth.
The
healing victim if they are alive must keep growing, because that is the
nature of life. The Word says that God’s Kingdom will always
increase. We go from glory to glory. We grow up and grow up and grow
up. If we stop growing, we can rest in God, but if we are not resting
in Him or growing, then we are in a death process. We are to occupy
until the Lord comes. While we occupy the land, God comes and builds
His structures within us. What gives life to the victim of
mind-control? There are various approaches to demons. Some say that
they are only psychological illusions, they pass by on the road to
Jerico. Some say that although demons exist, they are rare, so it is
not likely that the victim has a serious problem. They pass by too on
the road to Jerico. Others pass by and say, "I’ll pray for
you."
Others shout the name of Jesus and pass on. Others use their psychic
abilities to notice from a distance what the demons are. In other
words, they identify the problem, but pass by expecting that a few
words will bind up the half-dead man. The other approaches are various
ideas on how to help the man in the ditch. What we have been trying to
do, is give people an idea on how half-dead people can be mended. This
is somewhat of a spiritual first-aid class. There will be situations
that people will need our help in deliverance. They simply
can’t
mend their own wounds, nor even see them to clean them. Deliverance
prayers and supplications can be made that God would enlighten the
victim, that God’s angels would provide protection, and that
evil
spirits would be contained or kept away. Because demons are in ranks
and in hierarchal structures, it makes sense to try to go to the top to
do business. The ranking demon may be asked on what spiritual grounds
he has a right to be present. The legal right for that demon can be
confessed and removed. Long story made short, demons must submit to the
authority of Jesus Christ of Nazareth and His blood. If the deliverance
minister walks in that authority, he can command that demon to leave.
The response by demons when commanded to leave is varied. They will
play many tricks to try and stay or to try and protect their leaders.
Followup is important and the goal is a complete cleansing. If you are
going toward the rest room, to take two steps in that direction is just
not going to do the job. Go all the way. Keep praying and commanding
and confessing. Having a prayer group in support helps. With victims of
mind-control we are dealing with big daddy demons that the normal
person has not had to deal with. The Illuminati programmed multiples
are the pride of Satan. They don’t surrender easily.
Page 438 ...
DENIAL, identifying and dealing with defense mechanisms
Part of the reason that the Monarch trauma-based
mind-control’s
programming is successful is because the mind will naturally defend
itself against threatening ideas. This defense is usually on a
subconscious level--that is, people often do not even realize that the
mind is putting up defenses. This is because the human mind is SO GOOD
at defending itself. If our minds were to allow us to realize our minds
defend themselves from something--then that would in itself indicate
that what is being denied was real--so even the denial is denied!
Denial is a natural part of the mind’s abilities. However,
denial
can often prevent us from moving forward and facing the issues we
actually need to face. There are several forms of denial and we need to
identify and recognize these forms in order to identify and recognize
these forms in ourselves. I will now list some of the kinds (forms) of
denial that a person can have.
· SIMPLE DENIAL: Pretending that something does not exist
when
it really does, for instance ignoring & discounting physical
symptoms that may indicate the presence of problems. (For instance, the
host personality of a programmed multiple will destroy evidence of the
existence of any other alter.)
· MINIMIZING: Being willing to acknowledge a problem, but
unwilling to see its severity. (For instance, the front alters will
acknowledge their ways some past abuse, but they will minimize the
extent of the abuse, and they will not acknowledge that the abuse is
ongoing.)
· BLAMING: putting the blame on someone else for causing the
problem; the behavior is not denied, but its cause is someone
else’s fault. (Examples, are blaming one’s parents
for your
adult behavior, blaming one’s husband or wife for
one’s
overeating. In terms of programming, an example would be that some
alters perceive that other alters are the cause of their problems, but
that they are just fine.)
· EXCUSING: Offering excuses, alibis, justifications and
other
explanations for our own or other’s behavior. For instance,
calling the boss for a friend and telling the boss the person is sick
when they are really drunk. (This is a built in mechanism of the
mind-control. For instance, an assassination alter will be told that
the target they killed deserved to die.)
· GENERALIZING: Dealing with problems on a general level,
but
avoiding personal and emotional awareness of the situation or
conditions. Example is when we might sympathize with a
friend’s
"flu" problems when the real problem is a drug problem. (Some alters
tell the therapist, "I’m not in therapy, the other alter is
in
therapy." The problem of mind-control is not being addressed as
mind-control, the real issue is being disavowalled. Some therapists
contribute to this because they don’t understand the dynamics
of
mind-control, and they mistakingly think that their client is the host
alter. They are failing to see the bigger picture.)
· DODGING: Changing the subject to avoid threatening topics,
this includes being adept at small talk, never getting to real issues.
(Alters love to talk about non-threatening issues with their
therapists, as great deal of busy work can take place without much
progress.)
· ATTACKING: Becoming angry and irritable when reference is
made
to the existing condition, thus avoiding the issue. This includes being
unwilling to share one’s feelings.
Page 439
ALL OF US NEED TO SCRUTINIZE OURSELVES--WHAT TYPES OF DENIAL TO WE
PRACTICE TO PROTECT OURSELVES FROM WHAT IS PERCEIVED AS PAINFUL??
Children and even adults will perceive certain new foods as dangerous
and painful. They will do anything and make any excuse not to eat what
they don’t want to. At times there are legitimate concerns,
but
in general what is perceived as threatening is not. If the child ate
his broccoli or his peas he would in fact be getting better nutrition.
Denial seems to protect us--but often it protects us from what we
really need to deal with.
p_439-2.jpg
Page 440 ...
DREAMWORK, understanding
We believe that this section may present the reader with the best look
into
programmed MPD (DID) and dreams that has been published. This Dream Work
section will be divided up into the following subtopics:
· Part A: The Meaning of Dreams
· Part B. Dream Telepathy & MPD
· Part C. A Listing of Research into MPD (DID) &
Dreams
· Part D. Important Findings of MPD (DID) Dream Research
· Part B. Our suggestions concerning MPD Dream Work
· Part F. Standard Illuminati Programming concerning dreams
& memories
Part A. The Meaning of Dreams
Everyone dreams, and many people are fascinated in dreams, the
difficult part is what do individual dreams mean? In a biblical study
that our co-author Fritz made of the entire Word of God to determine
how God communicates with mankind, he found that in an overwhelming
percentage of cases, Almighty God used dreams to communicate to
mankind. Joseph and Daniel got recognition by interpreting dreams
(called oneicromancy) correctly. Joseph interpreted the
Pharaoh’s
dream about seven years of plenty and seven years of famine. On a stone
tablet in front of the Great Sphinx, another Pharaoh, Thutmes IV,
records a dream he received that his reign would be long and fruitful.
This was one of what the ancient Egyptians called "divine dreams from
the gods". On the flip side of things, the rational thinkers of the
18th century claimed that dreams were only the result of indigestion or
cold drafts, and were meaningless. Obviously, not all dreams are a
message from God, nor are they all simply the result of poor
indigestion of pizza. or an open window at night. The priesthoods of
the ancient mystery religions began research into dreams and began
using them in various capacities. In the healing temple of ~Esclepius,
the priesthood would place sick people on a couch in the temple, and
would instruct them that a god would give them in a dream the remedy
for their illness. The suggestion that the dreamer would learn of his
health problem in his dream often worked. Modern researchers would not
blame any particular god for this being successful, they would
interpret it as the unconscious mind releasing information about the
body that wouldn’t normally surface in the waking conscious
mind.
This ancient practice is similar to modern researchers who have had
great success in placing hypnotic commands into people (where the
subjects were told not to remember the command) to dream about
particular things, with the result that then the researchers have
observed that the subjects do indeed create dreams about the suggested
subject matter. The resulting dreams are about the suggested matter
according to the subject’s mind’s own tastes.
It’s
been documented that people who have suffered traumas, such as
refugees, soldiers, and victims of SRA have nightmares that are a
direct result of their traumas. Some therapists do dream work with
refugees, post-traumatic stress disorder and DID clients. When
multiples get memories that surface as dreams, these dreams repeat
themselves and they leave the victim with profound feelings, often the
strong sense of depersonalization. Several therapists/researchers (see
Cushway & Sewell, 1992 and others) have discovered that
nightmares
can be used as a key indicator of PTSD (which is a problem that DID
victims face.) (Non-multiples, of course, also at times experience
auto-biographical dreams.) One dream researcher (Wunder, 1993)
Page 441 ...
discovered that siblings of disabled children had many common themes in
their dreams, including the desire to be a type of "saviort, dreams of
guilt that they were normal, the idea that something or someone (such
as a fairy godmother) would change things, and sorrow about their
siblings disability. Programmed multiples are also going to have dreams
surface that relate to inner concerns.
Yes, the imagery of our nightmares and dreams do have relevant
information about our deep concerns. The high frequency of nightmares
has been directly shown to be linked to unpleasant life experiences,
especially recent ones. Common sense would teach us many of these
things, but it helps that people have validated these in studies, so
that some of these things go beyond the realm of opinion.
Part B. Dream Telepathy & MPD
Psychiatric journals have been publishing for several years documented,
authentic, scientific, controlled experiments where telepathic messages
have been sent to and received by people in the dream state. On the one
hand, while most people believe these kinds of things happen, they will
also generally, when asked if such things happen, say that they do not
believe they happen. This is because there is a strong
scientific-cultural bias against the fact of telepathic messages
occurring in the dream state. Common scientific awareness
hasn’t
caught up to both common sense and specific research into telepathic
dreams. The natural response designed to protect those with
"politically correct views" is to ask, "How does one distinguish
between a telepathic dream and a lucky coincidence considering the
numbers of dreams sent?" "At what point does one realize that a dream
is not mere coincidence?" These are legitimate questions, and there has
been legitimate research which has legitimately answered them. The
original scientific work in this area was done by the British Society
for Psychical Research, who did most of their work with the elite
British aristocracy beginning in the 1880’s. Their initial
findings were written up in Phantasms of the Living. Since then, a
great deal more research has been completed. The two types of
telepathic dreams that are quite frequently experienced are death
messages and in-trouble messages. Some of the documented cases of
telepathic messages between total strangers are absolutely amazing.
While the public is still debating the existence of such already
scientifically proven phenomena, the Illuminati have been constructing
telepathic and astral projection capabilities into their hierarchy
slaves. Whether the therapist is at a place to admit the existence of
these phenomena or not, they will have to face the fact that deeper
hierarchy alters believe they have these capabilities, & they
will
resist treatment and resist the success of therapy because they believe
they are still participating fully with the Illuminati cult during
sleeping hours. Nor will the therapist make significant progress by
trying to debunk these capabilities, when these alters have personal
experiences of having learned and travelled to rituals on the astral
plane. A beginning point for therapists to learn about Dream Telepathy
would be the book Dream Telepathy by Montague Ullman, M.D., Stanley
Krippner, Ph.D. and Alan Vaughan.
Part C. A Listing of Research into MPD (DID) & Dreams
Because the potential benefits through dream therapy are great and
still to be discovered, this section is covering the topic in greater
depth than some of the other topics. For those who want to check the
professional literature concerning dreams and their relationship with
MPD (DID) we provide the following list:
Page 442 ...
Franklin, J. (1990). "Dreamlike thought and dream mode processes in the
formation of personalities in MPD." Dissociation, 3(2), pp. 70-80
Gabel, S. (1989) "Dreams as a possible reflection of a dissociated
self-monitoring system." Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, 177,
pp. 560-568.
Gabel, 5. (1990). "Dreams and dissociation theory: Speculations on
beneficial aspects of their linkage." Dissociation, 3(1), pp. 38-47
Leviton, H.L. (1967) "Depersonalization and the dream." Psychoanalytic
Quarterly, 36, pp. 157-171.
Marmer, S.S. (1980) ‘The dream in dissociative states." In
J.M.
Natterson (ed.), The dream in clinical practice (pp. 163-175). NY:
Jason Aronson.
Myers, W.A. (1976). "Imaginary companions, fantasy twins, mirror dreams
and depersonalization." Psychoanalytic Quarterly, 45, pp 503-524.
Peterson, E., Gooch, N.L., & Freeman, L. Nightmare. NY:
Richardson & Steirman, 1987.
Sidis, B. (1918) "A Clinical study of a dream personality." Journal of
Abnormal Psychology, 13, pp 137-1 57.
Ullman, M. (1989). "Commentary: Dreams as a possible reflection of a
dissociated self-monitoring system." Journal of Nervous and Mental
Disease, 177, pp. 569-571.
Part D. Important Findings of MPD (DID) Dream Research
One study (Hartman, 1984) showed that people who normally have
recurrent nightmares have more permeable mental boundaries between
fantasy and reality, and are confused in their self-image. This
principle would certainly apply to people with DID. Cernovsky (1988)
did research into the dreams of those who suffer from Post-Traumatic
Stress syndrome. And Jeans (1976), Gabel (1989, 1990), Marmer (1980),
and Salley (1988) did research into dreams and therapy of MPD clients.
Worthy of comment here, is that Gabel was exploring the dreams of DID
clients as repressed memories. Not only does this make common sense,
but as an Illuminati programmer, our alters who were programmers were
very aware that memories can surface as dreams. We were taught to make
sure that the victim’s mind was properly prepared so that it
would not allow trauma and memory to surface in dreams. We will discuss
indepth the mind-control programming in this area later in this
article. Another therapist/researcher who did a great deal of work with
dreams to help DID (MPD) clients was S.S. Marmer. He was able to help
alters understand how their systems were built by using dream therapy,
and was able to use dream content to help break down the dissociation.
He believed that each alter is able to create its own dreams separately
from other alters. Dr. Frank Putnam found that he was able to get
valuable information from the dreams of his multiples that he
couldn’t get from hypnosis and
hypnosis-with-the-affect-bridge.
Putnam discovered that the repressed memories surfacing as dreams were
so traumatic that his clients were dissociating the dreams. This author
(Cisco), as a recovering multiple, has personally experienced this.
Also we have discovered that fragments of the dissociated dream may
linger, and these fragments may be helpful to go back and recover more
of the memory. We also discovered that it is helpful to have a support
person record and relate what the system is screaming during sleep, or
saying during their sleep so that the memory is not lost. Putnam
states, "When listening to this [MPD dream] material, I treat it as a
dissociative experience similar to, for example, an out-of-body
experience. The details and setting of these repetitive traumatic
nightmares seem to be more clearly based on actual settings than are
most dreamscapes and can often be used to determine what age the person
was and
Page 443 ...
where he or she was when the trauma occurred. One can search the
personality system for alters who were created during this time period
in the patient’s life. The postdream residual effects are
also
important and can be used as a starting point for affect bridge work.
MPD patients seem to be more willing to share and work with dream
material than with other forms of memory for trauma." (Diagnosis
&
Treatment of Multiple Personality Disorder, p. 202) Oaklander, who used
work with dreams to assist therapy, wrote, "In general, dreams serve a
variety of functions for children. They may be an expression of
anxiety--things that worry them. They may express feelings that
children feel unable to express in real life. [bold added] They may
depict wishes, wants, needs, fantasies, questions and curiosities,
attitudes. The dream can be an indication of a general stance or
feeling about life. It may be a way of working through feelings and
experiences -situations that children are unable to deal with directly
and openly." (1969, p. 150) Therapists have been using dreamwork
(dreams) as a source of information that helps them to understand how
the victim is processing horrible experiences, problem-solving, and
adjusting to changing personal and social circumstances in life. An
example of how dreams relate to these things, is Zaya’s study
in
1988 that showed that expectant fathers went through three stages of
dream content in anticipation of their new child. Here was a good
example of the unconscious preoccupation of fathers toward the new
child expressing itself symbolically in their dreamscapes.
Part E. Our suggestions concerning MPD Dream Work
The therapist is going to have to differentiate between symbolic
meanings (for example a dream image of a "broken egg in a nest" which
in one case represented a situation of family violence), and actual
memories coming to the surface. The therapist is in a position of
helping the victim move from making "no sense" of a dream to a place
that it "makes sense". The type of questions that may be helpful would
include, "how did you feel when...? or, "how do you feel now about...?,
or "what color was...?" or, "have you considered how such-and-such
might relate to such-and-such in your daytime life?" The therapist is
facilitating the victim in discovering possible avenues of enquiry. For
instance, in a dream having a baby in it, the victim might be asked,
"What do babies mean to you?" Although this type of exploration may
seem slow, when done by a skilled therapist some valuable work can
occur. It may also be possible to influence victims to become more
lucid dreamers. Lucid dreaming is when a person is conscious that they
are dreaming & asleep, while still in the REM sleep state.
Unfortunately, the current vocabulary of words are unsuitably very
primitive for discussing different altered states of consciousness
& unconscious mental activity. "Awake", "asleep" &
"dream" are
very crude terms to describe the various states that the mind can place
itself in. A variety of techniques in training the mind while it is
awake, have proven to result in changes in the remembrance and
perception of dreams. While these are too extensive to try to cover
here, there might be some possibilities to explore in this area for
helping DID.
A mother while asleep will still have a mind that is scanning her
external environment. She may sleep through her husband coming home
from work, but wake up at the slightest noise from her baby. This type
of behavior shows that the dreamer is still scanning his or her
external environment. Most people do not have well-trained minds when
it comes to states of consciousness.
Page 444 ...
Swami Rama, an expert in putting his body into different trance states,
had worked with his various states of mind so well, that even during
clinical studies while Swami Rama was in deepest sleep states (where
people are "dead to the world"), he was still aware of everything going
on in the room. Most multiples, because their mind is so traumatized
and ever-vigilant, will never completely go to sleep, but will have an
external alter awake in trance while the other alters go into a
trance-sleep. The example of Billy Graham, a programmed multiple, who
only sleeps in a zombie-trance state with his eyes open, was reported
in the Vol 2 Formula book. Each time a slave goes to sleep, internal
alters bring trauma memories to the sleeping alters as dreams, and
condition the slave to fear sleep. Dreams may indicate that the part
that holds a particular memory is ready to work on the memory that came
up in the dream. REM sleep, the place where most dream occurs, is the
most similar type of sleep in brain wave patterns to the waking brain.
However, dreams that are carried out in the non-REM sleep phases have
been discovered to be closer to reality than REM sleep dreams. This
applies to everyone. Because the dreamer is still in contact with his
environment, (granted that this contact is different than being awake),
the dreamer can have his or her dream influenced by externals and
internals. Gas on the stomach may be interpreted as a nightmare,
internal bladder trouble may be dreamed about as a trip to the
restroom, an alarm clock may be dreamed about as a church bell, the
smell of smoke may cause one to dream of a building exploding, and the
smell of cologne may cause a dream of a perfume factory, etc. This is
why listeners can identify with the joke about the dreamer who dreams
he ate a giant marshmallow and wakes up missing his pillow. Many
dreamers have the ability to dream about things that are suggested to
them, such as in a hypnotic suggestion, before bed time. Victims of
mind control can, if they want, via self-hypnotic statements suggest to
themselves that they would like every dream that night to be about a
particular theme. The mind will decide what it has that matches during
their sleep that night the suggested theme, so this method is not going
to contaminate the mind, it is simply telling the mind what mental
files or associated mental files to allow to drift up from deep in the
mind into the dream state. A support team member can repeat personal
names during REM sleep, and this may trigger the mind to bring up some
mental files that relate to that name. Again, because the mind is not
in a conscious logical state, the relationship between the file and the
name said may not be the typical type of relationship experienced
during waking hours. For example, the name "Stan" said aloud to the
dreamer might evoke a dream about stamps. Another possible method to
elicit dream material for work is to trigger the system. The alter
system can be triggered via movies or by going to particular settings
where they were traumatized. The movies that trigger certain
auto-biographical dreams may trigger the dreams in a way that only
appear to have remote connections, but at the deeper levels of the mind
are connected in some way by the mind. In other words, triggering by
watching negatively-charged movies may be helpful to therapy, but the
memory & feelings which are pulled to the surface (evoked) may
be
completely unexpected.
Part F. Standard Illuminati Programming concerning dreams &
memories
The programmers put into place a system of alters whose function is to
control memories. These alters are created from
Page 445 ...
the purely logic side of the brain, and have been logically programmed,
and tend to be perfectionists in their work. They have been programmed
to see themselves as unicorns, pegasi (winged horses), and horses. We
have touched on these horse alters in our Illustrated Guidebook and the
Vol. 2 book, for instance, the Vol 2 book reports that JER 37:3 is used
to put in the programming that if a certain boundary is crossed, the
horses are activated to protect the system. The horses work at night
when an alter system goes to bed. They dump their memories into the
dream state for various purposes.
The base imagery to create the unicorns, Pegasi & horses is
laid in
with the film Fantasia (see Chapter 5). Later when the specific approx.
4-year-old alters are given their scripts, they choose alters who are
heartless and purely logic to tell a script like the following one. A
typical script for the horse alters during programming would be as
follows: "Pegasi are handsome winged horses who graze in the treetops
and have their home in the gourd. The gourd is an alternate world where
black pearls store memories. Because the horses are magical they can
fit their big selves into a tiny gourd. They are black and their eyes
glow faintly. They are led by a stallion Trojan, who is also known as
the Dark Horse, and who commands all the spirits who lack bodies. He
rules the kingdom of dreams. It is the job of the night mares to carry
the dreams that are made in the gourd to all the sleepers of the
outside world who need them. The reason that the night mares give
dreams to people is so they know what they have done that is bad. Night
mares have no feelings. Those who gain feelings are soon no good for
their work. Souls with feelings are not able to be tough like the night
mares must be. A night mare must be careful to frighten with the fewest
possible images so that the dreamer will not think the dreams to be a
common everyday thing. If they have trouble doing their jobs, if they
get bored, then the night mares can let their little colts take over
their jobs. Night mares can not speak out loud, but can make dreams of
a nonfrightening nature to those who are awake, and to those who say
what the night mare wishes to talk about. They only come when people
are asleep. They can go through walls and solid things under the cover
of darkness. The moon & the horses go together. Night mares
must
flee from the sun. They only are safe travelling at night. Each night
mares’ hoofprint is a the spot one sees on the moon. Those
spots
on the moon were named after each mare, such as Mare Imbrium, &
Mare Crisis & Mare Frigoris. It is very bad to be seen by
anyone
when a mare delivers her dreams. The Mare Imbrium had to leap thro